Yamaha DSP-AX620 Handleiding

Categorie
Audio versterkers
Type
Handleiding
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia ID
V722690
DSP-AX620
Natural Sound AV Amplifier
Amplificateur audio-vidéo
G B
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
DSP-AX620
0100AX620(GB)-cv1/4 1/24/1, 11:01 AM1
II
II
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the
right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for
ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical
shock, do not place this unit where it may get
exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this
unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room
with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside
this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 On the top of this unit, do not place:
Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Containers with liquid in them, as they may
cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,
curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation.
If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal
injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified
is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be
held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical
storm.
14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/
or liquid drops inside this unit.
15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods
of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models
only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage
BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called
the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
Special Instructions for U.K.
Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING
CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
CAUTION
0101AX620(GB)_Cau_EN 1/23/1, 9:25 AM2
1
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
FEATURES ............................................................ 2
GETTING STARTED ........................................... 3
Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ........................ 4
Front Panel ............................................................... 4
Remote Control ........................................................ 6
Description of the Numeric Buttons ........................ 7
Using the Remote Control ........................................ 8
Front Panel Display .................................................. 9
Rear Panel .............................................................. 10
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP .............................................. 11
Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 11
Speaker Placement ................................................. 11
CONNECTIONS ................................................. 12
Before Connecting Components ............................ 12
Connecting Audio Components ............................. 12
Connecting Video Components .............................. 14
Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 16
Connecting an External Amplifier (Europe and U.K.
models only) ....................................................... 18
Connecting an External Decoder ........................... 18
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ....................... 19
Connecting the Power Supply Cords ..................... 19
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ......................... 20
OSD Modes ............................................................ 20
Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 20
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ......................... 21
Summary of SPEAKER SET Items
1A through 1E .................................................... 21
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER
OUTPUT LEVELS ......................................... 22
Before You Begin ................................................... 22
Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 22
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................... 24
Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26
Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 28
Normal Stereo Reproduction .................................. 29
BASIC RECORDING ......................................... 30
ADVANCED OPERATION
SET MENU .......................................................... 31
Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 31
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 32
2 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and
right main speakers) ........................................... 34
3 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 35
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 35
5 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 35
6 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) .................. 36
7 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ................................ 36
8 SP DELAY TIME ............................................... 37
9 DISPLAY SET ................................................... 37
10MEMORY GUARD ........................................... 37
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT
SPEAKERS ...................................................... 38
SLEEP TIMER .................................................... 39
Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 39
Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 39
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................. 40
Selector Dial ........................................................... 40
Commonly Used Buttons in Any Position of the
Selector Dial ....................................................... 41
Controlling the Components Connected
to This Unit ........................................................ 41
Button Names and Functions in Each Position ...... 42
Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 45
Returning to the Factory Setting ............................ 46
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................. 47
Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 47
CINEMA DSP Programs ........................................ 47
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER
EDITING ......................................................... 50
What is a sound field? ............................................ 50
Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 50
Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 51
Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 51
Sound Field Parameter Descriptions ...................... 52
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 55
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 59
GLOSSARY ......................................................... 60
INDEX .................................................................. 62
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:25 AM1
2
FEATURES
Other Features
96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter
SET MENU which Provides You with
10 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your
Audio/Video System
Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance
Adjustment
6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other
Future Formats
BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing
Bass Response
On Screen Display Function Helpful in
Controlling This Unit
S Video Signal Input/Output Capability
Component Video Input/Output Capability
Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks
Sleep Timer
Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes
y indicates a tip for your operation.
Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases
when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control
is given in parentheses in this manual.
Built-in 5-Channel Power Amplifier
Minimum RMS Output Power
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz 20 kHz)
Main: 90 W + 90 W (8 )
Center: 90 W (8 )
Rear: 90 W + 90 W (8 )
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China and General models only]
(10% THD, 1 kHz)
Main: 115 W + 115 W (8 )
Center: 115 W (8 )
Rear: 115 W + 115 W (8 )
Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field
Processing
DTS Decoder
Dolby Pro Logic Decoder
Dolby Digital Decoder
Hi-Fi DSP
CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
or DTS
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, AC-3, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby
Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and
pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater
Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:25 AM2
3
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Installing Batteries in the Remote
Control
Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the
+ and marks on the batteries with the polarity markings
(+ and ) inside the battery compartment.
Notes on batteries
Change the batteries periodically.
Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline
and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging
carefully as these different types of batteries may have
the same shape and color.
GETTING STARTED
Checking the Package Contents
Check your package to make sure it has the following items.
Changing batteries
As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the
remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash
or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these
conditions, change all of the batteries.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have
been cleared.
Note
If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately.
Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into
contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment
thoroughly before installing new batteries.
1
2
3
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Quick Reference Card
Quick Reference Card
Connection guide
Remote control
A/B/C/D/E
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:25 AM3
4
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on or sets this unit in the standby mode. When you
turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a
4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power to receive infrared-signals from the remote
control.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
4 INPUT MODE
Selects the mode of input for sources that send two or
more types of signals to this unit (see page 26 for details).
You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH
INPUT as the input source.
5 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
6 6CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.
The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or
the input selector buttons on the remote control).
7 BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF
When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass
frequency of the left and right main speakers by +6 dB
(60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This
boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer.
However, this boost may not be noticeable if 1B MAIN
SP on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and 1D LFE/
BASS OUT is set to SWFR.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
EFFECTSET MENU
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+ +
SURROUND
DIGITAL
–+
1
2
3 4
5
6
8
9 0
qw
e
r
t
u
7
y
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:25 AM4
5
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 BASS
Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right
main speakers.
Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to
decrease the low-frequency response.
9 TREBLE
Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right
main speakers.
Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to
decrease the high-frequency response.
Note
If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the
center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and
right main speakers.
0 SPEAKERS A/B
When pushed in (ON), these buttons turn on the set of
main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on
the rear panel.
q PHONES jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the speakers.
y
(Europe and U.K. models only)
When you connect headphones, no signals are also output to
the OUTPUT jacks.
w VIDEO AUX jacks
Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console. To reproduce source
signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input
source.
e SET MENU
Enters the SET MENU.
r Multi jog knob
Selects and adjust the SET MENU item after pressing
SET MENU.
Selects the DSP program after pressing DSP PROGRAM.
t DSP PROGRAM
Switches the function of the multi jog knob for selecting
DSP program.
y EFFECT
Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off.
If you turn off the output of these speakers by using
EFFECT, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except
for the LFE channel are directed to the main left and right
channels.
When Dolby Digital or DTS signals are mixed, the left
and right main channel signal levels may not match.
u INPUT l / h
Selects the input source (CD, TUNER, MD/CD-R, DVD,
D-TV/CBL, VCR 1, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR) you
want to listen to or watch.
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:25 AM5
6
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
TV VOLUME
TV POWER
EFFECT
e
r
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
8
q
w
0
t
y
u
i
o
This section describes the basic operation of this unit with
the remote control. First, set the selector dial to the AMP/
TUN position. See REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
for full details.
Select the
AMP/TUN
position.
1 DSP
Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the DSP
program selector.
2 Indicator window
Shows the name of components which can be controlled.
3 Numeric buttons (Input selector buttons)
These buttons select the input source.
See Description of the Numeric Buttons for the
numeric buttons.
4 6CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.
5 TEST
Outputs the test tone.
6 ON SCREEN
Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video
monitor.
7 j / i (/+)
Adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items.
/+ is displayed on the on-screen display.
8 LEVEL
Selects the effect speaker channel (center, rear and
subwoofer) so you can adjust their output level
independently.
9 SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
0 INPUT
Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the input
selector.
q Indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
w Selector dial
Turn this dial to select the position for the component to
be controlled. (The proper code must be set up for your
component. See Setting the Manufacture Codes.) When
a position is selected, the remote control is set to that
component operation mode.
e A/B/C/D/E, PRESET /+
These buttons are used to select a preset station when
using YAMAHA tuner.
A/B/C/D/E: To select one of 5 preset station groups (A
to E)
PRESET /+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8)
r u/d
Select DSP program parameters and SET MENU items.
t SET MENU
Enters the SET MENU.
y POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
u STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
Remote Control
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:25 AM6
7
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
A
B
i VOLUME +/
Increases or decreases the volume level.
o MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output
to the previous volume level.
EFFECT
Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off
in the following cases:
When the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position.
While the indicator is lit for about 3 seconds after
pressing DSP.
Description of the Numeric
Buttons
The numeric buttons function in various ways depending
on the position of the selector dial or the combination of
other instructions.
When selecting an input source
Input selector
buttons
1 Press INPUT regardless of the position of
the selector dial.
The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds.
2 You can select an input source with the
numeric buttons and 6CH INPUT while the
indicator is lit.
When selecting a DSP program
and turning on or off the effect
speakers (center and rear)
DSP program
group buttons
A
1 Press DSP regardless of the position of the
selector dial.
The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds.
2 You can select a DSP program with the
numeric buttons and turn on or off the effect
speakers (center and rear) by pressing
EFFECT while the indicator is lit.
B
1 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN
position.
2 You can select a DSP program directly with
the numeric buttons and turn on or off the
effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing
EFFECT.
6CH INPUT
EFFECT
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM7
8
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Using the Remote Control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
Handling the remote control
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,
stove or bath;
dusty places; or
in places subject to extremely low temperatures.
DIGITAL
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
30° 30°
Approximately 6 m (20 feet)
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM8
9
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front Panel Display
1 t indicator
Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on.
2 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP.
3 g and o indicators
Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit
is reproducing. g lights up when the built-
in Dolby Digital decoder is on. o lights up
when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on.
4 Input source indicator
Shows the current input source with a cursor.
5 x indicator
Lights up when you select a DSP program.
6 v indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
dB
ms
PCM
DSP
DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC
A
SP
B
VIRTUAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO LOGIC DTS
MOVIE THEATER 1
2
ENTERTAINMENT
SLEEP
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
1 2
3
4
5
6 7
8
9
0 q
7 Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
8 DSP program indicators
The name of the selected DSP program lights up when
the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE
THEATER 2 or q/DTS SURROUND DSP program is
selected.
9 Multi-information display
Shows the current DSP program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
0 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
q SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM9
10
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
(Europe model)
Rear Panel
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
3 GND terminal
See page 12 for connection information.
4 6CH INPUT jacks
See page 18 for connection information.
5 Video component jacks
See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.
6 Speaker terminals
See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.
7 OUTPUT jacks (Europe and U.K. models only)
See page 18 for connection information.
8 AC power cord
Connect to a power outlet.
9 AC OUTLET(S)
Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/
video components (see page 19).
0 Audio component jacks
See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.
q SUBWOOFER jack
See page 17 for connection information.
w IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your
speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode
before you change the setting of this switch (see page 19).
China and General models only
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
See page 19.
SWITCHED
100W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
OUTPUT
MAIN
R
L
R
L
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER
+
REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
––
+
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV/CBL
YP
B
/C
B
P
R
/C
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2/DVR
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
PHONO
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
TUNER
GND
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
R
L
R
L
MAINS
R
L
2
6 7
0 q
1 4 5
8 9
w
3
0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM10
11
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
Speakers to Be Used
This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-
field quality with a 5-speaker system, using left and right
main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center
speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with
different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a
moving human voice and other types of sound may not
shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers
from the same manufacturer to ensure even tonal quality.
The main speakers are used for the main source sound
plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers
from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are
used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center
speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If
for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker,
you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained
with the full system.
The main speakers should be high-performance models
and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system. The other
speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers.
For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use
high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over
the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.
Use of a subwoofer expands your
sound field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from
any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when
the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back.
The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.
Speaker Placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
Main
speaker (L)
Center speaker
Main speaker (R)
Rear speaker (R)
Rear speaker (L)
1.8 m
Main speakers
Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position,
facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet)
above the floor.
Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front
face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to
the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the
monitor and centrally between the main speakers.
Note
If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will
be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case,
1A CENTER SP on the SET MENU is set to NONE.
Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because
low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better
to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall
reflections.
CAUTION
Please use magnetically shielded speakers. Sometimes
a video monitor may be adversely affected even when
magnetically shielded speakers are used. Separate the
speakers from the monitor if this happens.
PREPARATION
Subwoofer
0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM11
12
CONNECTIONS
Before Connecting Components
CAUTION
Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been
completed.
Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, + to + and “–” to “–”. Some
components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions
for each component to be connected to this unit.
When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or
changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, @, # etc.
After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.
Connecting Audio Components
Connecting to digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of
digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital
and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to
both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given
to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
y
You can designate the input for each digital jack according to
your component by using 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT on the SET
MENU.
About the dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack
before you connect the fiber optic cable.
Do not discard the cap. When you are not
using the optical jack, be sure to put the
cap back in place. This cap protects the
jack from dust.
Note
The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.
If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this
standard, this unit may not function properly.
Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It
simply reduces noise in the signal. In some cases, you may
hear less noise if you do not connect to the GND terminal.
Connecting a tuner
You can listen to an FM or AM broadcasting by
connecting AM/FM tuner.
To get clearer reception, connect the antennas correctly.
Refer to your tuners operation instrustions for details.
Connecting a CD player
y
The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has a
coaxial digital output jack.
When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital
jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack.
Connecting an MD recorder, CD
recorder or tape deck
y
When you connect your recording component to both the
analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given
to the digital signal.
Notes
When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its
power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit
may distort the sound from other components.
Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are
independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to
the analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the
digital jack.
0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM12
13
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV/CBL
YP
B
/C
B
P
R
/C
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2/DVR
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
PHONO
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
TUNER
GND
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
R
L
L R
L R
L
R
C
L
R
L
R
OO
L R
OUTPUT
GND
OUTPUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
CENTER
OUTPUT
MAIN
OUTPUT
SURROUND
OUTPUT
INPUT OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
INPUT
L
R
L
R
C
O
MD recorder
or
CD recorder
indicates signal direction
indicates coaxial cables
CD player
Turntable
External decoder
indicates left analog cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates optical cables
(Europe model)
AM/FM Tuner
0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM13
14
CONNECTIONS
YP
B
/C
B
P
R
/C
R
Connecting Video Components
About the video jacks
There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composit video
signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals.
The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
) video signals. The jacks are also separated
into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component
(e.g. Y, C
B
, C
R
/Y, P
B
, P
R
/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction.
If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the
S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks
on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
VIDEO jack (composite)
S VIDEO jack
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
y
Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input
through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are
output through the corresponding composite video, S-video,
and component jacks, respectively.
If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary
to make composite video connections. If both types of
connections are made, this unit gives priority to the S-video
signal.
You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A
and B jacks according to your component by using 4 I/O
ASSIGNMENT on the SET MENU.
Notes
Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when
connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owners manual that came with the component being
connected.
Video monitor with a 21-pin connector (Europe and U.K. models only)
Make a connection as shown on page 15 with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable.
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
These jacks are used to connect any video input source
such as a game console to this unit.
AUDIO OUT R
AUDIO OUT L
VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL OUT
S VIDEO OUT
O
V
L
R
S
VIDEO AUX
S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
Game console
0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM14
15
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV/CBL
YP
B
/C
B
P
R
/C
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2/DVR
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
PHONO
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
TUNER
GND
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
R
L
V
V
S VIDEO
INPUT
S
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
L
R
S
L
R
L
R
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
AUDIO OUTPUTAUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
V
S
O
O
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
L
R
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
V
S
COMPONENT
OUTPUT
S
S VIDEO
INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
COMPONENT
INPUT
S VIDEO
OUTPUT
V
V
R
L
L
S
R
V
O
DVD player
TV/digital TV
or cable TV/
satellite tuner
VCR 1 or VCR 2/
DVR (digital video
recorder)
(Europe model)
indicates signal direction
indicates left analog cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates optical cables
indicates video cables
indicates S-video cables
Monitor
When using an LD player
Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack.
If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this units OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog
jacks, connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an RF OUTPUT jack to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3),
use a commercially available RF demodulator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack.
If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or to the
analog input jack (D-TV/CBL, VCR 1 or VCR 2/DVR). For details on connections and operations, refer to the
operation instructions for the LD player.
Note that this units remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer
code for the DVD/LD position.
SCART-plug (Europe
and U.K. models only)
No connection
0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM15
16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the Speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), + (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could
damage the unit and/or speakers.
If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers
in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.
Speaker cables
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One of the cables is colored or
shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.
1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8) of insulation
from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable
together to prevent short circuits.
12
Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals
1 Unscrew the knob.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
2
1
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative ()
MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either
of the MAIN A or B terminals.
REAR SPEAKERS terminals
A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
CENTER SPEAKER terminals
A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
10 mm (3/8)
y
(China and General models only)
Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the
knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of
the corresponding terminal.
Banana plug
0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM16
17
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
SWITCHED
100W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
OUTPUT
MAIN
R
L
R
L
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER
+
REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+ ––+
D
T
OR
T
/
CBL
OMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAINS
Main speakers A
Right
Left
Main speakers B
Right Left
(Europe model)
Center speaker Rear speakers
Right Left
Subwoofer
system
SUBWOOFER jack
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier,
including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing
Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the
subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals
distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are
directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is
90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated
when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed
if they are assigned to this jack.
Notes
Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operating
instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible
using this units output level control of the effect speakers.)
Depending on the settings of 1 SPEAKER SET, 6 DOLBY
D. SET and 7 DTS SET on the SET MENU, some signals
may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.
0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM17
18
CONNECTIONS
Connecting an External Amplifier
(Europe and U.K. models only)
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the OUTPUT jacks as follows.
Note
When RCA pin plugs are connected to the OUTPUT jacks for
output to an external amplifier, do not use the corresponding
SPEAKERS terminals.
1 MAIN jacks
Main channel line output jacks.
Note
The signals output through these jacks are affected by the
BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION settings.
2 REAR (SURROUND) jacks
Rear channel line output jacks.
3 CENTER jacks
Center channel line output jacks.
OUTPUT
MAIN
R
L
R
L
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
1
2
3
Connecting an External Decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left
and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND
and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from
an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the
6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and
surround channels.
Notes
When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot listen to DSP programs.
When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing
items 1A to 1E on the SET MENU is not affected.
0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM18
19
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
SWITCHED
100W MAX.
TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch
WARNING
Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit
may be damaged.
If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may
not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby
mode.
Select the left or right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch
only when this unit is in the standby mode.
Switch
position
Speaker Impedance level
Main
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 4 or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 or higher.
Center
The impedance must be 6 or higher.
Rear
The impedance of each speaker must be 6 or higher.
Right
Main
If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 8 or higher.
If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of
each speaker must be 16 or higher.
Center The impedance must be 8 or higher.
Rear
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 or higher.
Left
Connecting the Power Supply Cords
After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if
you will not use this unit for a long period of time.
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
Europe, China and General models ............. 2 OUTLETS
U.K. model ..................................................... 1 OUTLET
Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from
your audio/video components to this unit. The power to
the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this units
STANDBY/ON (or POWER and STANDBY). These
outlets will supply power to any connected component
whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power
(total power consumption of components) that can be
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W.
SWITCHED
100W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN A OR B: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN A OR B: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
A
+
B:
16
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAINS
(Europe model)
(General model)
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
To AC outlet
SWITCHED
VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM19
20
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)
Full display Short display
You can display the operation information for this unit on
a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP
program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier
to see the available options and parameters than it is by
reading this information on the front panel display.
y
If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is
superimposed over the image.
The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will
not be recorded with any video signal.
You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when
a video source is not being reproduced (or the source
component is turned off) by using 9 DISPLAY SET on the
SET MENU.
OSD Modes
You can change the amount of information the OSD
shows.
Full display
This mode always shows the DSP program parameter
settings on the video monitor.
Short display
This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front
panel display at the bottom of the screen and then
disappears.
Display off
This mode briefly shows the DISPLAY OFF message
at the bottom of the screen and then disappears.
Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the
monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button.
P01 CONCERT HALL
INIT. DLY
45ms
ROOM SIZE 1.0
LIVENESS
5
P01 CONCERT HALL
y
When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h,
VOLUME and some other types of operation information are
displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that
for the front panel display.
The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the
OSD mode.
Selecting the OSD Mode
1 When you turn on the power, the video
monitor and front panel display show the
level of the main volume for a few seconds
and then switch to show the current DSP
program.
2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control
repeatedly to change the display mode.
The OSD mode changes in the following order: full
display, short display, and display off.
Notes
If you choose a video input source that has a component
connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN
jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO
OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is
output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks.
However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no
video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video
and composite video signals.
If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT
VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to
connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see
the OSD.
Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or
video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.
0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM20
21
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS
This unit is equipped with a main amplifier capable of handling 5.1 channel. Although up to 6 speakers can be
connected, it is possible to select the speaker mode that gives the best sound field effect according to the number and
size of speakers being used.
Before use, please set the speaker mode setting using 1 SPEAKER SET on the SET MENU described on page 32.
Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1E
Item Description
1A CENTER SP
1B MAIN SP
1C REAR L/R SP
Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers
are being used and their performance.
LRG/SML/NONE
1D LFE/BASS OUT
Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass
signal.
SWFR/MAIN/BOTH
1E MAIN LEVEL Selects the main speaker level.
Normal/10 dB
Control value (default
setting indicated in bold)
Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is
being used and its performance.
LRG/SML/NONE
Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main
speakers.
LARGE/SMALL
0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM21
22
ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
This section explains how to adjust the speaker output
levels by using the test tone generator. When this
adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening
position will be the same from each speaker. This is
important for the best performance of the digital sound
field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby
Digital decoder and DTS decoder.
Note
Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are
connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from
the PHONES jack when using the test tone.
Before You Begin
1 Press STANDBY/ON to
turn on the power. Turn on
the video monitor.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you are using two sets of the
main speakers, press both A
and B.
3 Set BASS and TREBLE on the front panel to
the center position and set BASS
EXTENSION to OFF.
Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY
SUR.)
The adjustment of each speaker output level should be
made at your listening position with the remote control.
1 Set the selector dial to the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)
position.
2 Press TEST to output the test tone.
3 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test
tone.
The test tone is heard from the left main speaker,
center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker
and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced
for 2.5 seconds each time.
BASS TREBLE
+
+
LEFT SURROUND
(TEST L SUR.)
RIGHT SURROUND
(TEST R SUR.)
CENTER
(TEST CENTER)
RIGHT
(TEST RIGHT)
LEFT
(TEST LEFT)
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
EFFECTSET MENU
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
+
1
3
3
2
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2,6
5
4
1
3
STANDBY
/ON
SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ON
OFFON
BASS
EXTENSION
Set to OFF.
0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM22
23
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONSADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
The state of the test tone output is also shown on the
monitor by an image of the audio listening room.
This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.
y
If 1A CENTER SP on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the
center channel sound is automatically output from the left and
right main speakers.
Note
If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the
unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.
4 Press LEVEL repeatedly
to select the speaker to be
adjusted.
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker to be
adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in
the reverse order.)
5 Press j / i repeatedly to
adjust the output level of
the currently selected
speaker so that it
becomes almost the
same as that of the main
speaker.
While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the
selected speaker.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the output levels of
the center, left rear and right rear speakers.
6 When the adjustment is
complete, press TEST.
The test tone stops and the
current DSP program appears
on the front panel display and
on the video monitor.
Notes
For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to the
effect speaker level adjustment described on page 38.
After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the
speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an
actual source when using the effect speaker level adjustment
described on page 38.
y
You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers
(center, left rear and right rear) to +10 dB. If the output level of
these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even
after you have increased the output level of these speakers up
to +10 dB, set 1E MAIN LEVEL on the SET MENU to
10 dB. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to
about one-third of the normal level. After you have set 1E
MAIN LEVEL on the SET MENU to 10 dB, adjust the
levels for the center and rear speakers again.
TEST DOLBY SUR.
LEFT
0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM23
24
BASIC PLAYBACK
3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one
of the input selector buttons) to select the
input source.
The current input source is indicated on the front
panel display with a cursor.
The current input source name and input mode
appear on the front panel display and on the video
monitor for a few seconds.
Front panel
or
Remote control
Selected input source
BASIC OPERATION
When using the remote control, set the selector dial to
the AMP/TUN position.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or B
to select the main
speakers to be used.
If you are using two sets of
main speakers, press both A
and B.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to turn on
the power. Turn on the video monitor.
The front panel display and the video monitor show
the level of the main volume for a few seconds and
then switch to show the current DSP program.
Select this: To reproduce the signal from
this component
INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
1
5
6
3
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
EFFECTSET MENU
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
STANDBY
/ON
+
1
3
56
5
2
Front panel
Remote controlFront panel
or
STANDBY
/ON
SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ON
PHONO: Turntable
CD: CD player
TUNER: AM/FM tuner
MD/CD-R: MD recorder/CD recorder/tape deck
DVD: DVD player
D-TV/CBL: TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite
tuner
VCR 1: Video cassette deck 1
VCR 2/DVR: Video cassette deck 2/digital
video recorder
V-AUX: Another audio/video component
(connected to the VIDEO AUX
jacks on the front panel)
0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 1/23/1, 9:26 AM24
25
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
6CH INPUT
+
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
PCM
To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks
Press 6CH INPUT until 6CH INPUT appears on the
front panel display and on the video monitor.
Front panel
or
Remote control
Notes
If 6CH INPUT is shown on the front panel display and on
the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select
another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector
buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off 6CH INPUT from the
front panel display and the video monitor.
If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press 6CH INPUT.
4 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the
component.
5 Adjust the volume to the desired output
level.
or
Front panel
Note
If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR
OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced
sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered. In these
cases, turn on the component.
6 Use the digital sound field processor.
See Selecting a Sound Field Program.
Front panel
or
Remote control
To mute the sound
Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio
output.
Press MUTE on the
remote control.
To restore the audio output to
the previous volume level,
press MUTE again.
y
You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as
VOLUME +/.
During muting, MUTE ON appears on the front panel
display and on the video monitor.
When you have finished using
this unit
Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set
this unit in the standby mode.
Notes on the digital signal
The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle
96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a
source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and
set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation
instructions for the player.) Note the following when a
96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:
1. The following indication will appear on the front panel
display.
2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be
output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the
left and right main speakers.
Note
If 1B MAIN SP on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and
1D LFE/BASS OUT is set to SWFR, or 1D LFE/BASS
OUT is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the
subwoofer.
3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on
page 38 cannot be made.
VOLUME
BASS TREBLE
+
+
OFFON
BASS
EXTENSION
Front panel Remote control
DSP
PROGRAM
If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS
EXTENSION etc. These controls are only effective
for sound from the main speakers.
0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM25
26
BASIC PLAYBACK
INPUT MODE
BGV (background video) function
The BGV function allows you to combine a video image
from a video source with a sound from an audio source.
(For example, you can listen to classical music while you
are watching a video.)
Select a source from the video group and then select a
source from the audio group with the input selector
buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does
not work if you select the sources with INPUT l / h on
the front panel.
Input Modes and Indications
When using the remote control, set the selector dial to
the AMP/TUN position.
This unit comes with various input jacks. If your
component is connected to more than one type of input
jack, you can set the priority of the input signal.
Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector
button that you have pressed to select the
input source on the remote control)
repeatedly until the desired input mode is
shown on the front panel display and on the
video monitor.
Front panel
or
Remote control
Input mode
AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is
automatically selected in the
following order:
1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal
2) Digital (PCM) signal
3) Analog signal
DTS: In this mode, only the digital input
signal encoded with DTS is selected
even if another signal is input at the
same time.
ANLG (ANALOG): In this mode, only the analog input
signal is selected even if a digital
signal is input at the same time.
Notes
If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is
selected.
When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the
type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source.
The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and
DVD players in the following situation:
When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is
performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when
playback is resumed.
Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when
playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input
mode set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to
ANALOG.
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM26
27
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
Notes on playing a source
encoded with a DTS signal
If the digital output data of the player has been
processed in any way, you may not be able to
perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital
connection between this unit and the player.
If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and
set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces
the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you
want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the
source to a digital input jack and set the input mode
to AUTO or DTS.
If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit
reproduces no sound.
The following phenomena may occur if the input
mode is set to AUTO when playing back source
encoded with a DTS signal.
If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS
signal, this unit automatically switches to the DTS-
decoding mode to prevent noise from being
generated during subsequent operation. (The t
indicator lights up on the front panel display.) The
t indicator may flash immediately after
playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has
finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal
can be played back while this indicator is flashing.
(The indicator will flash for less than a minute.) If
you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the
input mode back to AUTO.
The t indicator may flash when a search or
skip operation is performed. If this status continues
for a certain length of time, the unit will
automatically switch from the DTS-decoding
mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the
t indicator will go out.
0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM27
28
BASIC PLAYBACK
Selecting a Sound Field Program
You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a
DSP program. For details about each program, see
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM.
On the remote control
1 Press DSP.
The indicator lights up for
about 3 seconds.
A/B/C/D/E
1
2
y
If the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position, skip this
step.
2 Use the numeric buttons to select the
desired program before the indicator goes
off.
For example, to select the sub-program
SPECTACLE, press MOVIE THEATER 1
repeatedly.
The name of the selected program appears on the
front panel display and on the video monitor.
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
EFFECTSET MENU
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+ +
SURROUND
DIGITAL
+
1
2
DSP
DIGITAL
MOVIE THEATER 1
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
Program group
Program name (sub-program)
On the front panel
1 Press DSP PROGRAM.
2 Turn the multi jog knob to
select the program.
The name of the selected
program appears on the front
panel display and on the video
monitor.
Notes
Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and
not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening
room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections
in your room to maximize the effect created by the program.
When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last DSP program used with that source.
When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source
and DSP program are memorized and are automatically
selected when you turn on the power again.
If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode
is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the
appropriate decoding program.
When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/
NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be
heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can
only be heard from the center speaker. However, if 1A
CENTER SP on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center
channel sound is output from the main speakers.
When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit
is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.
When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the
DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is
reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.
DSP
PROGRAM
+
0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM28
29
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
EFFECT
Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT
CINEMA
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field
effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using
YAMAHA original technology, natural surround
reproduction is possible through the generation of a
virtual speaker.
The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual
CINEMA DSP mode by setting 1C REAR L/R SP on
the SET MENU to NONE. Virtual CINEMA DSP is
performed by using the main speakers.
Note
This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if
1C REAR L/R SP is set to NONE in the following cases:
when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY
DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected;
when the sound effect is turned off;
when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;
when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;
when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played;
when using the test tone; or
when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT
CINEMA).
SILENT CINEMA
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel
of the DSP program while using headphones. This feature
delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if
listening through the speakers.
You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your
headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect
speakers are on.
Front panel
or
Remote control
y
If the selector dial is set to a position other than the DSP/TUN
position, first press DSP and then EFFECT on the remote
control.
Notes
If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the
center and rear speakers.
If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is
automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear
speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.
The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the
sound effect or if you set 6 D-RANGE on the SET MENU to
MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.
Normal Stereo Reproduction
Press EFFECT to turn off the sound effect
for normal stereo reproduction.
Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back
on.
0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM29
30
BASIC RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for these components.
1 Turn on the power to the unit and all
connected component.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
Front panel
or
Remote control
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
Notes
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION,
VOLUME, 2 L/R BALANCE on the SET MENU and DSP
programs does not affect the recorded material.
A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot
be recorded.
S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this units video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal by your VCR.
A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material
may infringe copyright laws.
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
Special considerations when
recording DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS
Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded.
Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the
players operation instructions so that the audio signals
are output from the players analog outputs.
INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
2
SILENT VIDEO AUX
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL
6CH INPUTINPUT MODE
INPUT
VOLUME
EFFECTSET MENU
DSP
PROGRAM
BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS
AB
OFF
ONOFFON
STANDBY
/ON
DIGITAL
BASS
EXTENSION
+
+
SURROUND
DIGITAL
+
2
0106AX620(GB)_30_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM30
31
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Adjusting the Items on the SET
MENU
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
Notes
Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.
SET MENU and the multi jog knob on the front panel can also
be used to make these adjustments.
1 Set the selector dial to the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)
position.
2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to
10) you want to adjust.
y
By pressing SET MENU (or SET MENU on the front panel)
repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when
pressing d.
SET MENU
ADVANCED OPERATION
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
3,6
4,5
1
2
The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the
speaker mode setting features. Use the SET MENU to
enjoy the optimum audio/video playback for your system.
y
You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a
source.
We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU
while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video
monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit
while adjusting the items.
Note
The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of
the OSD.
1 SPEAKER SET
1A CENTER SP
1B MAIN SP
1C REAR L/R SP
1D LFE/BASS OUT
1E MAIN LEVEL
2 L/R BALANCE
3 HP TONE CTRL
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT
4A CMPNT-V INPUT
4B OPTICAL OUT
4C OPTICAL IN
4D COAXIAL IN
5 INPUT MODE
6 DOLBY D. SET
LFE LEVEL
D-RANGE
7 DTS SET
8 SP DELAY TIME
9 DISPLAY SET
BLUE BACK
OSD SHIFT
DIMMER
10 MEMORY GUARD
SET MENU 1/3
1 SPEAKER SET
2 L/R BALANCE
3 HP TONE CTRL
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT
: Up/Down/
–/+ : Enter
SET MENU 1/3
1 SPEAKER SET
2 L/R BALANCE
3 HP TONE CTRL
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT
: Up/Down/
/+ : Enter
0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM31
32
SET MENU
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode
settings)
Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your
speaker configuration.
Notes
When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,
level adjustments in items 1B and 1D are possible, but those in
items 1A,1C and 1E are not affected.
When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level
adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected.
1A CENTER SP (center speaker
mode)
By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,
the unit can provide good dialog localization for many
listeners and superior synchronization of sound and
images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center
speaker depending on how you set this item.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire
range of the center channel signal is directed to the center
speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected with 1D
LFE/BASS OUT.
4 Press j or i once to enter the setup mode of
the selected item.
The last setting you adjusted appears on the video
monitor or on the front panel display.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you
adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust
the items again.
1A CENTER SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1A CENTER SP
LRG
SML
NONE
4A CMPNT-V INPUT
[B] D-TV/CBL
[A] DVD
y
When making adjustments through the front panel, turn the
multi jog knob one step to either the left or the right to enter
setup mode for the selected item.
Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub
item.
y
When making adjustments through the front panel, press SET
MENU.
5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting
of the item.
4B OPTICAL OUT
(1) MD/CD-R
4A CMPNT-V INPUT
[B] D-TV/CBL
[A] VCR 1
y
When making adjustments through the front panel, turn the
multi jog knob to change the settings.
6 Press u/d repeatedly until the current DSP
program appears or simply press one of the
DSP program group button to exit from the
SET MENU.
y
When operating through the front panel, press SET MENU
repeatedly until the DSP program name appears to exit from the
SET MENU.
or
0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM32
33
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker
mode)
The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers
depending on how you set this item.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE
Initial setting: LRG
LRG
Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or
if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The
entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the
left and right rear speakers.
SML
Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers.
The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
channel are directed to the speakers selected with 1D
LFE/BASS OUT.
NONE
Select this if you do not have rear speakers.
y
This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting
NONE for 1C REAR L/R SP.
1A CENTER SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1B MAIN SP
LARGE
SMALL
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1C REAR L/R SP
LRG
SML
NONE
1B MAIN SP
LARGE
SMALL
NONE
Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the
center channel signals are directed to the left and right
main speakers.
1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode)
The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending
on how you set this item.
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
Initial setting: LARGE
LARGE
Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire
range of the left and right main channel signal is directed
to the left and right main speakers.
SMALL
Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel
are directed to the speakers selected with 1D LFE/BASS
OUT.
Note
When you select MAIN for 1D LFE/BASS OUT, the low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are
directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the
main speaker mode.
0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM33
34
SET MENU
1D LFE/BASS OUT (bass out
mode)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency
signals are defined as 90 Hz and below.
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH
Initial setting: BOTH
SWFR
Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are
directed to the subwoofer.
MAIN
Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE
signals are directed to the main speakers.
BOTH
Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix
the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE
signals.
Notes
When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video
cassette etc.), select the BOTH position to direct low bass
signals (below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack.
When you select SMALL (SML) for items 1A, 1B and 1C, the
low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from those channels
are added to the LFE and output to the subwoofer.
1D LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR
MAIN
BOTH
1D LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR
MAIN
BOTH
1E MAIN LEVEL (main level
mode)
Change this setting if you cannot match the output level
of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers
because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of
the main speakers.
Choices: Normal, 10 dB
Initial setting: Normal
Normal
Normally select this setting.
10 dB
Select this if you cannot match the output level of your
effect speakers with that of your main speakers when
using the test tone. This setting decreases the main
speaker output level to about one-third of the normal
level.
2 L/R BALANCE (balance of the
left and right main speakers)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level
from the left and right main speakers.
Control range: 10 for L/R
Initial setting: 0
Press i to decrease the output level for the
left main speaker. Press j for the right main
speaker.
Note
The L/R BALANCE setting also applies to when headphones
are being used.
1E MAIN LEVEL
Normal
10dB
1E MAIN LEVEL
Normal
10dB
1D LFE/BASS OUT
SWFR
MAIN
BOTH
2 L/R BALANCE
L
I
I
R
0
: Exit/
/+ : Adjust
0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM34
35
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
3 HP TONE CTRL (headphone
tone control)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble
when you use your headphones.
Control range (dB): 6 to +3
Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)
4 I/O ASSIGNMENT
It is possible to assign jacks according to the component
to be used if this units COMPONENT VIDEO input jack
or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component
names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes
it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively
connect more component.
Once you assign, you can select that component with
INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons).
4A CMPNT-V INPUT (for the
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks)
Initial settings: [A] DVD
[B] D-TV/CBL
4B OPTICAL OUT (for the
OPTICAL OUTPUT jack)
Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R
4C OPTICAL IN (for the OPTICAL
INPUT jacks)
Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R
(3) DVD
(4) D-TV/CBL
4D COAXIAL IN (for the COAXIAL
INPUT jack)
Initial setting: (5) CD
Note
You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of
jack.
5 INPUT MODE (initial input
mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning
on the power of this unit with the source component
connected to more than one type of input jacks.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
Initial setting: AUTO
AUTO
Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the
type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.
LAST
Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last
input mode used for that source.
3 HP TONE CTRL
BASS
TRBL
+
0dB
4A CMPNT-V INPUT
[B] D-TV/CBL
[A] DVD
4B OPTICAL OUT
(1) MD/CD-R
4C OPTICAL IN
(2) MD/CD-R
(4) D-TV/CBL
(3) DVD
4D COAXIAL IN
(5) CD
5 INPUT MODE
AUTO LAST
: Exit
/
/+ : Select
0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM35
36
SET MENU
6 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital
set)
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes
Dolby Digital signals.
LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a
Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-
frequency special effect sound which is only added to
certain scenes.
Control value (dB): 20 to 0
Initial setting: 0 dB
Notes
Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your
subwoofer.
Normally, around 6 dB to 8 dB is most suitable for listening
at home.
D-RANGE (dynamic range)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the
difference between the maximum level and the minimum
level of sounds).
Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN
Initial setting: MAX
Select MAX for feature films.
Select STD for general use.
Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely
low volume level.
L-LEVEL BST
H-LEVEL CUT
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
MAX
Dialog
level
Input level
Output level
STD
Dialog
level
Input level
Output level
MIN
Dialog
level
Input level
Output level
Note
When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because
some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the
minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or
STD.
7 DTS SET (DTS LFE level)
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS
signals.
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS
signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special
effect sound which is only added to certain scenes.
Control range (dB): 10 to +10
Initial setting: 0 dB
Note
Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your
subwoofer.
7 DTS SET
LFE LEVEL 0dB
: Exit/
/+ : Adjust
6 DOLBY D. SET
: Select/
/+ : Adjust
LFE LEVEL
0dB
D-RANGE
MAX
STD
MIN
0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM36
37
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
L
C
C
R
RL
RR
8 SP DELAY TIME
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel
sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should
be the same distance from the listening position as the left
and right main speakers. However, in most home
situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the
main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center
speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to
the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the
same as the distance between the left and right main
speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay
time for the center speaker is especially important for
giving depth to the dialog.
Control range (ms): 0 to 5
Initial setting: 0 ms
Center speaker image
y
Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker
about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of
the center speaker.
8 SP DELAY TIME
: Exit/
/+ : Adjust
CENTER 0ms
9 DISPLAY SET
BLUE BACK
Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays
a blue background when theres no video signal input.
Nothing is displayed on the screen including the on-
screen display if OFF is selected.
Initial setting: AUTO
OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)
This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the
OSD.
Control range: +5 (downward) to 5 (upward)
Initial setting: 0
Press i to lower the position of the OSD.
Press j to raise the position of the OSD.
DIMMER
You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Control range: 4 to 0
Initial setting: 0
10 MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other settings on this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
Initial setting: OFF
Select ON to protect the following features:
DSP program parameters
All SET MENU items
Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels
The on-screen display (OSD) mode
Notes
When 10 MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use
the test tone.
When 10 MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select
any other SET MENU items.
9 DISPLAY SET
BLUE BACK AUTO
DIMMER 0
OSD SHIFT 0
10 MEMORY GUARD
OFF ON
: Exit
/
/+ : Select
0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM37
38
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2
1
3
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS
You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker
(center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening
to a music source.
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
1 Set the selector dial to the
AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN)
position.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker
changes and appears on the front panel display and
on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear,
left rear and subwoofer.
CENTER
R SUR.
L SUR.
SWFR
Center speaker output level
Right rear speaker output
level
Left rear speaker output
level
Subwoofer output level
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to
be adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection
in the reverse order.)
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
The control range for the center or left and right
rear speakers is from +10 dB to 10 dB.
The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB
to 20 dB.
Notes
If the speaker output mode is set to NONE, the output level of
that speaker cannot be adjusted.
When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you
made with the test tone will be changed.
To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting
procedure using the test tone on page 22 is recommended.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the output level of the effect speakers
you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so,
adjust the output level again.
0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 1/23/1, 9:27 AM38
39
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2
3
SLEEP TIMER
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The
sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer
also automatically turns off the external components
connected to AC OUTLET(S).
The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.
Setting the Sleep Timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Set the selector dial to a
position other than the TV
position.
3 Press SLEEP repeatedly
to set the amount of time
before this unit
automatically turns off.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
DSP
DIGITAL
SLEEP
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
120 90 60 30
The SLEEP timer is off
(SLEEP OFF).
(This is the state before
SLEEP is pressed.)
4 The SLEEP indicator soon lights up on the
front panel display after the sleep timer has
been set.
The display then returns to the previous indication.
Canceling the Sleep Timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until SLEEP OFF
appears on the front panel display.
After a few seconds, SLEEP OFF disappears, the
SLEEP indicator goes off and the display returns
to the previous indication.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit
in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote
control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by
disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet.
DSP
DIGITAL
SLEEP
VOLUME
CDTUNER PHONO
MD/CD-R
DVD
D-TV/CBL
VCR 1
VCR2/DVR
V-AUX
0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM39
40
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit.
It is also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the
proper manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component).
Note
For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual.
Selector Dial
Select the component (position) to be controlled by the remote control. For example, if the CD position is selected, the
remote control is set in the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled. When turning the selector dial,
the position changes as follows:
Notes
The general operational buttons on the remote control differ depending on the position of the selector dial. See the following pages
for details.
When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 46 are set for each dial position. If unable to
operate your YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code.
Selector
dial
AMP/TUN
You can perform the basic operations
of this unit.
CD
The code for a YAMAHA CD
player is factory-set.
CBL/SAT
A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled.
VCR
A VCR can be controlled.
TV
A TV can be controlled.
TAPE/MD
The code for a YAMAHA MD recoder is factory-
set. Be sure to set the proper code when
operating a CD recorder or tape deck.
DVD/LD & DVD MENU
An LD player can be controlled in
the DVD/LD position. A DVD player
can be controlled in the DVD/LD
and DVD MENU positions. The
code for a YAMAHA DVD player is
factory-set.
DSP/TUN
This unit can be controlled and DSP
programs can be selected directly.
0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM40
41
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
2
1
3
5
4
@
#
!
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2
5
4
1
3
6
Commonly Used Buttons in Any
Position of the Selector Dial
Regardless of the position of the selector dial, you can
control this unit and your TV with the following buttons.
Note
You have to set up the code for your TV in the TV position
before you can control the TV.
Controlling this unit
See Remote Control.
1 STANDBY
2 POWER
3 VOLUME +/
4 SLEEP
Note
If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial
to the TV position, this button is used to set the sleep timer for
the TV.
5 MUTE
Note
If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial
to the TV position, this button is used to mute the TV sound.
Controlling your TV
! TV POWER
@ TV INPUT
# TV VOLUME +/
Controlling the Components
Connected to This Unit
The example below describes the procedure for
controlling a YAMAHA CD player.
1 Set the selector dial to the
CD position.
2 Turn on the power.
3 Press INPUT.
The indicator lights up for
about 3 seconds.
4 Press CD while the
indicator is lit.
5 Press p.
See Button Names and
Functions in Eash Position
for the CD player operation
buttons.
6 Adjust the volume.
If you set the remote control with the manufacturer
codes listed from page i at the end of this
manual, you can control other brands of components.
See Setting the Manufacturer Codes for details.
0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM41
42
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Button Names and Functions in Each Position
TAPE/MD position (tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder)
Select the TAPE/MD position.
r Rec/Pause (tape/MD)
e Pause (MD/CD-R)
p Play
b DIR A (tape)
This button selects the playing direction of deck A.
Skip (MD/CD-R)
w Rewind (tape)
Search (MD/CD-R)
Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R)
INDEX (CD-R)
+10 (MD/CD-R)
Deck A/B (tape)
This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette
tape deck.
DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)
a DIR B (tape)
This button selects the playing direction of
deck B.
Skip + (MD/CD-R)
s Stop
f Fast forward (tape)
Search (MD/CD-R)
AV POWER
This button turns on the tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for
another manufacturer.
CD position
Select the CD position.
DISC SKIP /+
(for a CD player with CD changer)
p Play
b Skip
w Search
Numeric buttons
INDEX
+10
DISPLAY
e Pause
YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop
a Skip +
s Stop
YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop
f Search
AV POWER
This button turns on the CD player that has a remote
control with a power button if you have set up the
code for another manufacturer.
y Pause/Stop function
Press the button once to give a
pause in operation and press
once more to stop operation.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote
control supplied with your component.
0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM42
43
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
DVD/LD position
Select the DVD/LD position.
DISC SKIP /+ (DVD)
p Play
b Skip (DVD)
Skip/Chapter (LD)
w Search
Numeric buttons
INDEX/Time (DVD)
Chapter/Time (LD)
+10
DISPLAY
e Pause
a Skip + (DVD)
Skip/Chapter + (LD)
s Stop
f Search
AV POWER
(DVD) This button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer.
(LD) This button turns on the LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer.
DVD MENU position
Note
DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players.
Select the DVD MENU position.
DISC SKIP /+
Return
Menu select
Menu left
TITLE
Numeric buttons
INDEX
+10
DISPLAY
Menu up
Menu right
Menu down
MENU
AV POWER
This button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up
the code for another manufacturer.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote
control supplied with your component.
0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM43
44
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
VCR position
Select the VCR
position.
VCR REC
Press this button
twice to start
recording.
p Play
w Rewind
Numeric
buttons
Ch enter/Recall
_/_ _
CH /+
DISPLAY
e Pause
s Stop
f
Fast forward
AV POWER
This button turns on a VCR that has a remote control with a power
button if you have set up the code for your VCR.
CBL/SAT position
Select the CBL/SAT
position.
CH /+
Menu select
Menu left
Recall
Numeric buttons
Ch enter
_/_ _
DISPLAY/
Guide (SAT)
Menu up
Menu right
Menu down
MENU
AV POWER
This button turns on a cable TV/satellite tuner that has a remote
control with a power button if you have set up the code for your cable
TV/satellite tuner.
TV position
Note
You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for it in the VCR position.
The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code.
Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote
control supplied with your component.
A/B/C/D/E
Select the TV
position.
VCR REC
Press this button twice.
p VCR play
w VCR rewind
TV POWER
This button turns on a TV that has a
remote control with a power button if
you have set up the code for your TV.
TV VOL +/
TV INPUT
Numeric buttons
Ch enter/Recall
_/_ _
CH /+
DISPLAY
e VCR pause
s VCR stop
f
VCR fast forward
VCR power
TV SLEEP
TV MUTE
0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM44
45
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Setting the Manufacturer Code
You can set up the code for the manufacturer of your
component in each position of the selector dial.
1 Turn on your component to be used.
2 Set the selector dial to the
desired position for the
component (TAPE/MD, CD,
DVD/LD, etc.).
3 Press j / i at the same time for about
4 seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons
to enter the four-digit
manufacturer code for the
component to be used.
Make sure that the
indicator flashes twice.
If the indicator does not flash
or flashes rapidly several
times, repeat step 3 and re-
enter the code.
5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) to
check if you have set up the code correctly.
If your component cannot be
controlled with the remote
control, try setting another
code for the same
manufacturer.
Notes
You can set up only one code for one position.
In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions:
Be sure to set the selector dial to the DVD/LD position before
entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set up
the code for a DVD player when the selector dial is set to the
DVD MENU position. The code set up in the DVD/LD
position is also simultaneously set up in the DVD MENU
position.
If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed
for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied
with your component.
To use a second (and third) VCR
You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/
SAT and DVD MENU positions if a cable TV/satellite
tuner or DVD player is not being used.
Note
In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU
position, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player
in the DVD/LD position.
1 Turn on the VCR to be used.
2 Set the selector dial to the
CBL/SAT or DVD MENU
position.
3 Press j / i at the same time for about
4 seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
4 Use the numeric buttons
to enter the four-digit
code for the second (and
third) VCR. Make sure that
the indicator flashes
twice.
If the indicator does not flash
or flashes rapidly several
times, repeat step 3 and re-
enter the code.
5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) to
check if you have set up the code correctly.
If the VCR cannot be
controlled with the remote
control, try setting another
code for the same
manufacturer.
0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM45
46
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Returning to the Factory Setting
To return to the factory-set codes
in all positions
1 Press j / i at the same time for about
4 seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
2 Enter the code number 9990.
Make sure that the indicator flashes twice.
To return to the factory-set codes
in each position
1 Set the selector dial to the
position for the
component to be returned
to the factory setting.
2 Press j / i at the same time for about
4 seconds.
The indicator flashes twice.
3 Enter the code number 0000.
Make sure that the indicator flashes twice.
The following codes are factory set.
Selector dial position Component Code Set component Set code
TV TV 0101
CBL/SAT Satellite tuner 0006
VCR VCR 0002
DVD/LD DVD player 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player)
CD CD player 0005 (YAMAHA CD player)
TAPE/MD MD recorder 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder)
We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above.
0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM46
47
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to
play back various sound fields for the source you are listening to.
Note
Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you.
Hi-Fi DSP Programs
For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
No. Program (group) Sub-program Features
1 CONCERT HALL
A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections
from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great
deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage.
2 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York
jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field
offering a real and vibrant sound.
3 ROCK CONCERT
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was
recorded at LAs hottest rock club. The listeners virtual seat is at the center-left
of the hall.
4 ENTERTAINMENT DISCO
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a
big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a
high-energy, immediate sound.
5CH STEREO
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field
suitable for background music at parties.
Note
Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output.
The sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source
encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the
input source.)
CINEMA DSP Programs
For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6
No. Program (group) Sub-program Features
4 ENTERTAINMENT GAME
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
6 MONO MOVIE
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old
movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth
by using only the presence sound field.
5 TV SPORTS Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field
employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you
can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music
programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the
commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the
atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the
rear is properly restrained.
0109AX620(GB)_47-49_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM47
48
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
8 MOVIE
THEATER 2
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DGTL
ADVENTURE
DTS ADVENTURE
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing
the sound design of the newest 70-mm and
multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field
is made to be similar to that of the newest movie
theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field
itself are restrained as much as possible.
GENERAL 70 mm GENERAL Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DGTL GENERAL
DTS GENERAL
This program is for reproducing sounds from
70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and
is characterized by a soft and extensive sound
field. The presence sound field is relatively
narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward
the screen, restraining the echo effect of
conversations without losing clarity. For the
surround sound field, the harmony of music or
chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the
rear of the sound field.
ADVENTURE 70 mm
ADVENTURE
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS
9
q/DTS
SURROUND
NORMAL PRO LOGIC/
NORMAL
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DOLBY DIGITAL/
NORMAL
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS DIGITAL
SUR./NORMAL
DTS
The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds
and sound effects from sources.
The highly efficient decoding process improves
crosstalk and channel separation, and makes
sound positioning smoother and more precise.
In this program, the digital sound field processor
is not turned on.
ENHANCED PRO LOGIC/
ENHANCED
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DOLBY DIGITAL/
ENHANCED
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS DIGITAL
SUR./ENHANCED
DTS
This program ideally simulates the multi-
surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film
theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby
Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital
sound field processing create precise effects
without altering the original sound orientation.
The surround effects produced by this sound field
wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to
the left and right, and toward the screen.
Notes
The x indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program NORMAL of the q/DTS SURROUND program.
If 1A CENTER SP on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker.
The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME)
and 5 to 8.
MOVIE
THEATER 1
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DGTL
SPECTACLE
7
Sub-program
Input source Features
SPECTACLE 70 mm
SPECTACLE
Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9
Program
(group)
No.
DTS SPECTACLE
DTS
This program creates the extremely wide sound
field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely
reproduces the source sound in detail, making
both the video and the sound field incredibly real.
This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded
with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
(especially large-scale movie productions).
SCI-FI 70 mm SCI-FI
Analog, PCM,
Dolby Digital in
2-channel
DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital
(5.1-channel)
DTS SCI-FI
DTS
This program clearly reproduces dialog and
sound effects in the latest sound form of science
fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive
cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy
science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field
that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most
advanced techniques.
0109AX620(GB)_47-49_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM48
49
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
Presence DSP
sound field
Surround DSP
sound field
MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2
Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded
by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby
Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of
sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes.
The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without
using matrix processing. This units MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound
localization that 6-channel soundtracks do.
When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel
These programs express an immense sound field and a
large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound
from the main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a
Dolby Stereo theater.
70 mm SPECTACLE
70 mm SCI-FI
70 mm ADVENTURE
70 mm GENERAL
The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your
home. With the units MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of
being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology.
When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP)
These programs use YAMAHAs tri-field DSP processing
on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,
left surround and right surround channels. This
processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense
sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital-
or DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the
clear separation of all channels.
DGTL SPECTACLE
DTS SPECTACLE
DGTL SCI-FI
DTS SCI-FI
DGTL ADVENTURE
DTS ADVENTURE
DGTL GENERAL
DTS GENERAL
y
If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically
switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.
Presence DSP
sound field
Right surround DSP
sound field
Left surround DSP
sound field
0109AX620(GB)_47-49_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM49
50
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
What is a sound field?
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the players instrument,
there are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly
(50 ms 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting
from one surface only for example, from the ceiling or
a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns for any
particular environment, and provide vital information to
our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct
sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface walls, ceiling, the back of the room so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of
a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
Sound Field Program Parameters
DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine
the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from
you to the performer, etc. In each program, these
parameters are set with values precisely calculated by
YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.
It is recommended to use DSP programs without
changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also
allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with
one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those
parameters.
Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you
to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment
to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters
correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that
create the sound field you experience in an actual concert
hall or other listening environment. The size of the room,
for example, affects the length of time between the early
reflections. The ROOM SIZE parameter provided in
many of the DSP programs alters the timing between
these reflections, thus changing the shape of the room
you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of
the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a
significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb
sound, for example, cause the reflections and
reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly
reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a
longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters
allow you to control these and many other factors that
contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to
essentially redesign the concert halls, theaters, etc.
provided to create custom-tailored listening environments
that ideally match your mood and music.
See Sound Field Parameter Descriptions.
0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM50
51
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGSOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
Changing Parameter Settings
Although it is possible to enjoy playback on your system
without changing default setting parameters for the sound
field program, it is also possible to enjoy specifically
tailor the sound field program to the characteristics of the
source and the acoustics of the listening room.
1 Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN (or
AMP/TUN) position.
or
2 Turn on the video monitor
and press ON SCREEN
repeatedly to select the
full display mode.
3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
2
5
4
1
3
3
Program No. Program name (group)
Cursor
Parameters
Example of the MOVIE THEATER 1
4 Press u/d to select the
parameter.
5 Press j / i to change the
parameter value.
y
When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory-
set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name
on the video monitor.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to
change other program parameters.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter value you edited will
return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter
value again.
Resetting a Parameter to the
Factory-set Value
Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and
hold j or i until the value temporarily stops at the
factory-set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter
name disappears on the video monitor.
Notes
The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,
press u/d.
You cannot change parameter values when 10 MEMORY
GUARD on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to
change the parameter values, set 10 MEMORY GUARD to
OFF.
P07 MOVIE THEATER 1
P. INIT. DLY 13ms
70mm Spectacle
S. DELAY
23ms
P. ROOM SIZE 1.0
S. ROOM SIZE 1.0
0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 1/23/1, 9:28 AM51
52
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
Sound Field Parameter Descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening
room.
Note
Not all of the following parameters can be found in every program.
INIT.DLY (initial delay)
(P.INIT.DLY for the presence sound field)
Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the sound source by adjusting the delay between the
direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Control range: 1 99 msec
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther
the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large
room, set it to a large value.
INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY
Level
Time
Level
Sound source
Early
reflections
Time
Level
Time
Sound source
Reflection surface
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
ROOM SIZE
(P.ROOM SIZE for the presence sound field)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the
surround sound field becomes.
Control range: 0.1 2.0
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Level
Time
Level
Time
Sound source
Early reflections
Level
Time
Sound source
First reflection
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 1/23/1, 9:29 AM52
53
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITINGSOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
LIVENESS
Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay.
Control range: 0 10
Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as dead, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as live. The
LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the liveness of the
room.
Level
Time
Dead
Level
Sound source
Time
Level
Time
Live
Sound source
Small reflected sound
Small value = 0
Large reflected sound
Large value = 10
S.DELAY (surround delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound
field.
Control range: 0 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.)
S.INIT.DLY (surround initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side
of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear
channels are used.
Control range: 1 49 msec
0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 1/23/1, 9:29 AM53
54
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING
S.ROOM SIZE (surround room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
Control range: 0.1 2.0
S.LIVENESS (surround liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
Control range: 0 10
CT.DELAY (center delay)
Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 50 msec
LS.DELAY (left surround delay)
Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 50 msec
RS.DELAY (right surround delay)
Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 50 msec
0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 1/23/1, 9:29 AM54
55
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact
the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
General
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/ON
(or POWER) is
pressed, or enters in
the standby mode
soon after the power
has been turned on.
19
The power cord is not connected or the plug
is not completely inserted.
Firmly connect the power cord.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on
the rear panel is not fully set to the left or
right position.
Set the switch fully to the left or right position
when the unit is in the standby mode.
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on
this unit and on all speakers are secure and
that the wire for each connection does not
touch anything other than its respective
connection.
19
16, 17
12 – 15
24
16, 17
25
24
APPENDIX
14, 15
19
16, 17
39
12 – 17
25
25
On-screen display
does not appear.
The setting for the on-screen display is set to
“DISPLAY OFF”.
Select the full display or short display mode.
No sound and/or no
picture.
Incorrect input or output cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input
selector buttons).
The speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
The main speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A
and/or B.
The volume is turned down.
Turn up the volume.
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Digital signals other than PCM audio,
Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this
unit cannot reproduce are being input to
this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc.
Play a source whose signals this unit can
reproduce.
The picture does not
appear.
The output and input for the video are
connected to different types of video jacks.
Make connections using the same type of
jack (between composites, S-VIDEOs, or
components) for both the input and output.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuit has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
is set to the appropriate position and then turn
the unit back on.
Check the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn the unit back on.
The sleep timer has functioned.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Only the speaker on
one side can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
20
The BLUE BACK setting under “9
DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is set
to OFF, and no video signal is input to this
unit.
Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show
the OSD.
37
0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 1/23/1, 9:54 AM55
56
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
No sound from the
effect speakers.
The sound effect is off.
Press EFFECT to turn it on.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
decoding DSP program is being used with
material not encoded with Dolby Surround,
Dolby Digital or DTS.
Select another DSP program.
A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being
input to this unit.
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is set
to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is
set to NONE.
Select the appropriate mode for your center
speaker.
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4)
has been selected.
Select another DSP program.
The source encoded with a Dolby Digital
or DTS signal does not have a center
channel signal.
No sound from the
rear speakers.
The output level of the rear speakers is set
to minimum.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
A monaural source is being played with the
program 9.
Select another DSP program.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
“1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU
is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Select BOTH.
The source does not contain low bass
signals (90 Hz and below).
“1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU
is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
Poor bass
reproduction.
“1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU
is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system
does not include a subwoofer.
Select MAIN.
The output mode for each speaker (main,
center or rear) on the SET MENU does not
match your speaker configuration.
Select the appropriate output mode for each
speaker based on the size of the speakers in
your configuration.
29
47, 48
25
38
32
47, 48
38
47, 48
34
34
34
32, 33
12 – 15
12
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the
problem persists, the cables may be
defective.
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cord of your
turntable to the GND terminal of this unit.
The volume level is
low while playing a
record.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to the unit
through an MC-head amplifier.
12, 13
0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 1/23/1, 9:54 AM56
57
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the REC OUT
jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
The effect and
surround sounds
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the effect and
surround sounds by a recording component.
The sound is degraded
when listening with
headphones
connected to a tape
deck or CD player that
is connected to this
unit.
There is noise
interference from
digital or high-
frequency equipment,
or the unit.
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen
by an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or by
a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the
outlet and then plug it in again after about
30 seconds.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
of this unit.
A source component is only connected to the
analog input jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the digital
input jacks of this unit.
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
“10 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU
is set to ON.
Select OFF.
This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit.
The unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move the unit further away from such
equipment.
12
30
12 – 15
37
0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 1/23/1, 9:54 AM57
58
TROUBLESHOOTING
Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter
type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking
the remote control sensor of this unit.
Reposition the unit.
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries with new ones.
The unit or other
component cannot be
controlled.
The component to be controlled has not been
selected.
Set the selector dial to the appropriate position,
corresponding to the component to be
controlled.
The remote control cannot control system
components.
The manufacturer code has not been set up
properly.
Enter the code again.
Try setting another code for the same
manufacturer.
Depending on the manufacturer or the
model, some components cannot be
controlled with this unit’s remote control
even though the code has been set up
properly.
Use the original remote control supplied with
your component.
8
3
40
45
After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if
you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode,
disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.
0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 1/24/1, 10:55 AM58
59
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ................................. 90 W
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ................................................ 100 W
DIN Standard Output Power
[Europe model only]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms .................................................. 130 W
IEC Output Power
[Europe model only]
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ................................................ 100 W
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China and General models only]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ................................................... 115 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 ohms ................................................... 120/140/175/210 W
Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms .............................................. 80 or more
Frequency Response
CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (MM) .................................................................. ±0.5 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO MM (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V, REC OUT) .... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 ohms, Main L/R)
............................................................................... 0.06% or less
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted)
[Europe and U.K. models] .................................... 81 dB or more
[China and General models] ................................. 86 dB or more
CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .... 100 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 kohms terminated) to Main L/R .................. 60 dB/45 dB
Tone Control (Main L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
BASS EXTENSION ................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz
Phones Output ..................................................... 400 mV/560 ohms
Input Sensitivity
CD, etc .............................................................. 150 mV/47 kohms
PHONO ............................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kohms
6CH INPUT ...................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms
Maximum Input Signal
PHONO MM (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ...................... 100 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ....................................2.2 V or more
Output Level
REC OUT ........................................................ 150 mV/1.2 kohms
PRE OUT [Europe and U.K. models only] ......... 2.1 V/1.2 kohms
SUBWOOFER .................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type
[Europe and U.K. models] ....................................................... PAL
[China and General models] ................................................. NTSC
Composite Video Signal Level ................................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
S-Video Signal Level
Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
C .................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms
Component Video Signal Level
Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms
P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
....................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms
Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more
Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB
GENERAL
Power Supply
[Europe and U.K. models] ................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz
[China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz
[General model] ......................... AC110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption ............................................................... 260 W
Standby Mode [Europe and U.K. models] ........................... 0.9 W
Maximum Power Consumption
[General model only]
5-ch, 10% THD ................................................................... 610 W
AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum)
[Europe, China and General models] ................... 2 (SWITCHED)
[U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (SWITCHED)
Dimension (W x H x D) ................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm
Weight ................................................................................... 10.5 kg
Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control
....................................................................................... Batteries
................................................................. Quick Reference Card
........................................................................ Connection Guide
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 1/24/1, 5:40 PM59
60
GLOSSARY
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording
system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects:
two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel
for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special
sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that
gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.
With three front channels (left, center and right), and two
rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-
range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency
effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is
counted as 0.1 channel).
Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and
the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with previously
unheard of excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial
representation of DTS digital surround in your home.
This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel
sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two
rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer,
for a total of 5.1 channels).
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1 channel systems.
CINEMA DSP
DIGITAL
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and
designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and
so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are
differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth
of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any rear speakers by using
virtual rear speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a
minimum two-speaker system that does not include a
center speaker.
0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 1/23/1, 9:54 AM60
61
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
GLOSSARY
S VIDEO signal
With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
P
B
/C
B
and P
R
/C
R
signals for the chrominance. Color can
be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because
the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number
of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
I/O assignment (SET MENU)
Although component is normally connected according to
jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a
function that assigns jacks according to the component
being connected. If the component being used differs
from the component name shown for this unit’s
component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks,
it is possible to assign jacks according to the component
being connected. This makes it possible to change the
jack assignment and effectively connect more component.
0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 1/23/1, 9:54 AM61
62
INDEX
A
Accesories ................................................................................... 3
AC outlets .................................................................................. 19
B
Balance (L/R BALANCE) (SET MENU) ................................. 34
BGV function ............................................................................ 26
C
CBL/SAT position ..................................................................... 44
CD position ................................................................................ 42
CINEMA DSP ..................................................................... 47, 60
Component video ...................................................................... 61
Connections
Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder,
CD player and turntable) .................................................... 12
External amplifier (Europe and U.K. models only) ........... 18
External decoder ................................................................. 18
Power supply cords ............................................................ 19
Speakers ............................................................................. 16
Video components (DVD player, VCR and
TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ......................... 14
D
Delay time ................................................................................. 37
DISPLAY SET (SET MENU)
BLUE BACK ..................................................................... 37
DIMMER ........................................................................... 37
OSD SHIFT ........................................................................ 37
DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU)
D-RANGE .......................................................................... 36
LFE LEVEL ....................................................................... 36
Dolby Digital ............................................................................. 60
Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ........................................... 60
DSP program
CINEMA DSP program ...................................................... 47
Hi-Fi DSP program ............................................................. 47
DTS ........................................................................................... 60
DTS SET (SET MENU) ............................................................ 36
Dust protection cap .................................................................... 12
DVD/LD position ...................................................................... 43
DVD MENU position ................................................................ 43
E
External decoder ........................................................................ 18
F
Front panel ................................................................................... 4
Front panel display ...................................................................... 9
H
HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) ................................................ 35
I
I/O ASSIGNMENT (SET MENU) ...................................... 35, 61
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ........................................... 19
INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ................................................... 35
Input modes ............................................................................... 26
L
LFE ...................................................................................... 36, 60
M
Manufacturer codes ................................................................ 45, i
Memory back-up ........................................................... 32, 38, 51
MEMORY GUARD (SET MENU) ........................................... 37
Muting ....................................................................................... 25
P
PCM ........................................................................................... 61
PHONO jack .............................................................................. 12
Playing ....................................................................................... 24
Power supply cords ................................................................... 19
R
Rear panel .................................................................................. 10
Recording .................................................................................. 30
Remote control
Basic operation ..................................................................... 6
Batteries ................................................................................ 3
Operation range .................................................................... 8
Setup codes ......................................................................... 45
S
Sampling frequency ............................................................. 25, 61
Selector dial ........................................................................... 6, 40
SET MENU ............................................................................... 31
SILENT CINEMA ............................................................... 29, 60
Sleep timer ................................................................................. 39
Sound field ................................................................................ 50
SP DELAY TIME (SET MENU) .............................................. 37
Speaker
Output balance (test tone) .................................................. 22
Output levels (LEVEL mode) ............................................ 38
Output mode (SET MENU) ............................................... 21
Placement ........................................................................... 11
SPEAKER SET (SET MENU)
CENTER SP ....................................................................... 32
LFE/BASS OUT ................................................................ 34
MAIN LEVEL .................................................................... 34
MAIN SP ............................................................................ 33
REAR L/R SP ..................................................................... 33
Stereo reproduction ................................................................... 29
Subwoofer ................................................................................. 17
S VIDEO ................................................................................... 61
T
TAPE/MD position .................................................................... 42
Test tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) ............................................... 22
TV position ................................................................................ 44
V
VCR position ............................................................................. 44
Video jack .................................................................................. 14
Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................................................... 29, 60
0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 1/24/1, 5:40 PM62
LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES
LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT
VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES
LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER
ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE
LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES
LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT
TV
ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911,
1021, 1081
AIKO 0891
AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231,
1191, 1351, 1591,
1641, 1791, 1891,
1981
AKURA 1331
ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361
ALBIRAL 1971
AMSTRAD 1301, 1511
ANAM 1171
ARC EN CIEL 0571
ARCAM 0571, 0761
ARISTONA 0751
ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641
ASA 0411, 0451, 0521,
0781, 0871, 1021,
1081, 1421, 2051,
2091, 2151, 2551
ASTRA 1511
ATANTIC 0761
ATLANTIC 0761
ATORI 1511
AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511
AUSIND 0491, 1411
AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481,
0491, 0601, 0781,
0951, 1051, 1081,
1391, 1421
BAIRD 1101, 1351
BANG & OLUFSEN 1081
BASIC LINE 1321, 1331
BAUER 1451
BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121,
0131, 0221, 1561
BEKO 2491, 2501
BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241,
0251, 0471, 0741,
2201, 2211, 2221,
2231, 2241, 2261,
2571, 2581
BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731,
0901, 1821
BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081
BRITANNIA 0761
BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021,
1081
BSR 0391, 0691, 1621,
1901, 1981
BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331,
1641, 1741, 2131,
2151
BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611
CANDLE 0791
CENTURY 1021, 1081
CGE 0491, 0811, 0981,
1401, 1531, 1611,
1621, 1981, 2201,
2251, 2271
CITIZEN 0791
CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971
CLATRONIC 1181, 1331
CONCERTO 0791
CONDOR 0761
CONTEC 0151, 1171
CONTINENTAL EDISON
0571, 0651, 0901
CRAIG 1171
CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021,
1081, 1401, 1981,
2201, 2251, 2271
CROWN 2541
CTC CLATRONIC 0261
CXC 1171
DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511,
2611
DANSAI 0101
DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601,
0971, 1101, 1691
DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601,
1101, 1681
DEGRAAF 0451, 1351
DIXI 0991, 1511
DOMEOS 0101
DORIC 1031
DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611,
1641, 2101
DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621,
2111
DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781,
1021, 1081, 1981,
2121, 2151
DYNATRON 0101
ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031
ELECTRO TECH 1511
ELEKTRONSKA 0771
ELMAN 0261, 1621
ELTA 1511
EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081,
1121, 1171, 1261,
1301
ERRES 0101
ETRON 1981
EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601,
0771, 1091, 1621,
2001
FENNER 0101, 1511
FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551,
0651, 0781, 0861,
0881, 1131, 1181,
1361, 1461, 1971,
1991, 2281, 2311,
2341
FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281
FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591,
1931, 2281
FILMNET 1141
FINLANDIA 0451, 2321
FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491,
0521, 0781, 0811,
0871, 1081, 1411,
1421, 1981, 2051,
2091, 2121, 2151,
2551
FIRST LINE 1981
FISHER 0021, 0091, 0141,
0511, 0601, 0801,
0821, 0981, 1021,
1081, 1981, 2091
FORGESTONE 2281
FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761,
1081, 1451, 1541,
1981
FORMENTI-PHOENIX
0021, 0431, 0451,
0591, 1411
FORTRESS 1081
FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981
FUJITSU 1261
FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171,
1181, 1261
FUTURETECH 1171
GBC 0021, 0141, 1321,
1511, 1621, 1981
GEC 0451, 1101, 1281,
2321
GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581,
0601, 1101, 1281,
1561
GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451,
1321, 1511, 1621,
1981
GENERAL TECHNIC 2681
GENEXXA 0451, 1331
GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761,
0791, 1371, 1491,
1511, 1561, 1621,
1641
GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371,
1641, 2301
GORENJE 0981, 1061
GRAETZ 0451
GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491,
0581, 0601, 1101,
1111, 1351, 1981,
2321
GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141,
0451, 0491,
0581, 0601,
1031, 1311,
1521, 1561,
1641
GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471,
0491, 0711, 0741,
1381, 2021, 2041,
2141, 2151
HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141,
0431, 0591, 1561
HANTAREX 0581
HEMMERMANN 0061
HIFIVOX 0331, 0571
HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451,
1261, 1351, 1511,
1641, 1981, 2011
HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031,
0081, 0141, 0291,
0331, 0341, 0451,
0601, 0631, 0701,
1281, 1561, 1601,
1821, 1831, 1841,
1861, 1871, 1881,
1891, 1941, 1981,
2051, 2321, 2341
HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511,
1621
IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811,
0981, 1401, 1611,
1621, 2201, 2251,
2271
INGERSOL 1511
INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841,
1101, 1331, 1371,
1511, 2011
INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2711, 2721,
2761, 2771, 2781
INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061,
0121, 0181, 0451,
0491, 1081, 1641,
1791, 1821, 1981,
2231
IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331,
1371, 1411, 1511,
2011
ISUKAI 1331
ITT 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431
ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431
JVC (VICTOR) 0071, 0721, 1441,
1581, 1591, 1741,
1791
KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331
KAMOSONIC 0601
KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841,
1091, 1321, 1511,
1561, 2051
KAWASHO 0761
KENDO 0261
KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951,
1981
KONKA 2701
KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021,
1081, 1541
i
08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 1/23/1, 10:01 AM2
KTV 0601, 1171
LENOIR 0601, 1511
LEYEO 1181
LIFETEC 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2671, 2681,
2691, 2711, 2761,
2771, 2781
LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581,
0611, 1081
LOGIC 1691, 2281
LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281
LOWEWE 0831
LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901
LUXMAN 0791
LUXMAN STEREO TUNER
0791
LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181,
0341, 0421, 0451,
0461, 0491, 0601,
0671, 1351, 1371,
1561, 1601, 1911,
1921, 1981
LYCO 1181
MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261,
0581, 0641, 0771,
1021, 1081, 1621,
1981
MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581,
0591, 0641, 0761,
1091, 2001
MANESTH 0101
MARANTZ 0101
MARELLI 1081
MARK 0101
MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601,
0691, 1101, 1151,
1241, 1271, 1301,
1511, 1561, 1681,
1691
MAXIMAL 0071, 1981
MCMICHAEL 1281
MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2671, 2681,
2691, 2711, 2721,
2761, 2771, 2781
MEMOREX 1511
METZ 0231, 0741, 1001,
1041, 1081, 1481,
2071, 2081
MGA 1231
MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641,
2651, 2711, 2761,
2771, 2781
MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491,
1381, 2141, 2151
MISTRAL 2281
MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231,
0661, 1191, 1201,
1231, 1671, 1691,
1741
MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581,
0591, 0761, 0771,
1371, 1431, 2031
MTC 0791
MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601,
0641, 0981, 1321,
1511
MURPHY 0451, 2091
MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031
N.E.I. 0101, 0961
NAD 1341
NEC 0141, 1711, 1721,
1731
NECKERMANN 0451, 0601,
0981, 1081,
1561, 1931,
1981, 2211,
2231, 2241
NEDIATOR 0101
NICAMAGIC 0761
NIKKAI 1101, 1331, 1641,
1701, 2011
NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591,
0641, 1381, 1411
NOGAMATIC 0571
NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431, 2461, 2791
NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331,
0451, 0531, 0541,
0571, 1051, 1131,
1591, 1791, 1811,
1821, 1891, 1941,
2631
OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981
OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321,
0441, 1661
ONCEAS 0601
ONWA 1171
ORION 0061, 0391, 0691,
0851, 1211, 1241,
1251, 1301, 1481,
1511, 1681, 1691,
1981, 2371, 2421
OSAKA 2011
OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011
OSUME 0151
OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121,
0141, 0221,
0601, 1561,
1741, 1981
PAEL 0591, 1411
PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211,
0451, 0701, 1311,
1751, 1961, 2561,
2741
PANORAMIC 2351
PATHE MARCONI 0571
PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591,
1621, 1661,
1971
PAUSA 1511
PAUZA 1511
PERDIO 0891, 1101
PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811,
0981, 1021, 1081,
1401, 1611, 1621,
1751, 2201, 2251,
2271, 2451, 2471
PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591,
0621, 0681, 0751,
0761, 1021, 1081,
1281, 2031, 2281,
2291, 2431, 2441,
2511, 2731
PHOENIX 1081
PHONOLA 0751, 1081
PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341,
1821
PRANDONI-PRINCE 0411, 0451,
0491, 0581,
1411
PRANDONI-PROMCE
0451, 0491, 0581
PRIMA 0451
PROFEX 1981
PROTECH 0641, 1181, 1981
QUELLE 0041, 0061, 0121,
0221, 0231, 0391,
0491, 0521, 0601,
0781, 1371, 1381,
1411, 1421, 1641,
1681, 2051, 2091,
2141, 2151, 2201,
2211, 2231, 2241,
2251, 2271, 2551,
2571, 2581
REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451,
0661, 0771,
1081
RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091
RADIOLA 2291
RANK 0481, 2151
RBM 2131, 2151
RBM (UK) 0481
REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641,
1981, 2331
REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081,
1031
REX 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
RFT 0991, 2511
ROADSTAR 1321, 1511
ROTEL 0151
SABA 0291, 0331, 0421,
0451, 0531, 0541,
0571, 0581, 0651,
0731, 0931, 1021,
1071, 1081, 1131,
1791, 1811, 1821,
1891, 1941, 2631
SACCS 1971
SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161,
1241, 1301, 1511,
1671, 1681, 1691
SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061,
0071, 0341, 0451,
0671, 1291, 1351,
1521, 1561, 1601,
1641, 1911, 1921,
1931, 1981, 2321
SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581,
0641, 1091, 1371,
1411, 2001
SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841,
0981, 1101, 1181,
1371, 1511, 2011
SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401,
0601, 0801, 0821,
0981, 1021, 1101,
1111, 1291, 1351,
1691, 1741, 2051,
2091, 2551
SBR 0681, 0751, 1281,
2281
SCHAUB LORENZ 0451
SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091,
0451, 0511, 0591,
0601, 0751, 1321,
1361, 1621, 1641,
2101, 2111, 2291
SCOTT 1171, 1261
SEG 0261, 0601, 0821,
0991
SEI 0641, 0691, 1081,
1301, 1481, 1981
SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
SENTRA 1601
SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191,
1761, 1781
SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581,
0641, 1021, 1081,
1981
SICATEL 1971
SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231,
0451, 0741, 2011,
2201, 2211, 2221,
2231, 2241, 2261,
2571, 2581
SILVER 1181
SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021,
1081
SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101,
0261, 0391, 0641,
0691, 0851, 0941,
1021, 1081, 1241,
1301, 1321, 1481,
1631, 1981
SKANTIC 0451
SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011
SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511
SONY 0141, 0171, 1121,
1681, 1691, 2751
SOUNDESIGN 1171
SSS 1171
STERN 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
SUNKAI 0691
SUPRA 0791
TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611,
1021, 1421, 1771,
1791, 2081
TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331,
1531
TASHIKO 0141
TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601,
0971, 1101, 1681,
1691
TCM 2621, 2641, 2711,
2761, 2771, 2781
TECHNICS 1311
TECHWOOD 0791
TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261
TELE 1141
TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731,
1821
TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311,
0551, 0731, 1131,
1471, 1591, 1791,
1801, 1811, 1821,
1991, 2161, 2171,
2181, 2191, 2201,
2251, 2271, 2521,
2631
TELETECH 1511
TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401,
2411
TENSAI 1331, 2091
TEXET 0601
THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531,
0571, 0631, 0651,
0731, 0901, 1241,
1571, 1591, 1791,
1811, 1821, 1891,
1941, 2531
THORN 0741, 0861, 2091,
2251, 2271, 2281
ii
08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 1/23/1, 10:01 AM3
THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371,
0551, 0651,
0781, 0861,
0881, 1131,
1181, 1361,
1461, 1971,
1991, 2281
TMK 0141, 0791, 1471
TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481,
1221, 1271, 1701,
1741, 1851, 2151,
2801, 2811
TRANS CONTINENS
0451
TRISTAR 2281
TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121
UHER 0431, 0451, 0481,
0491, 0511, 1311,
1541
ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591,
1021, 1081, 1981
UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051
UNIVOX 1971
VEGAVOX 0811
VEXA 0101, 1511
VIDEOTON 2481
VORTEC 0101, 0651
VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491,
1021, 1081
WALTHAM 0451
WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241
WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261,
0591, 0641, 0761,
1091, 1971, 1981,
2001
WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981
WEGA COLOR 1021
WELTBLICK 0101
WESTON 1621
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0101, 0261, 0431,
0591, 0761, 1401,
1541
YOKO 0601, 1511
ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
ZOPPAS 0451
CABLE TV
CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476
CLYDE CABLEVISION
1426
FILMNET 1396, 1436
FRANCE TELECOM 1386
GEC 1426
JERROLD 1416
MOVIE TIME 1466
NSC 1466
PHILIPS 1386
PIONEER 0006
SAMSUNG 1496
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
1486, 1506
STARCOM 1416
STS 1466
TANDBERG 1366
TELE 1436
TELE +1 1436
TELESERVICE 1406, 1476
TUDI 1376
UNITED CABLE 1416
ZENITH 1406
SATELLITE TUNER
AKAI 1276
ALBA 0826, 1276
AMSTRAD 0166, 0796, 1016,
1026, 1296
ANKARO 0476
AST 0406
ASTRA 0126
BARCOM 0476
BLAUPUNKT 0966
BMC SATELLITE 0106
BRITISH TELECOM 1276
BUSH 0826
BUSH (UK) 0956
CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276
CANAL PLUS (FRANCE)
1536
CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006
COLUMBUS 0616
CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426
DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866
DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476
DRAKE 1516
ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606,
0626, 0666, 0926,
0996, 1046, 1056,
1066, 1106
ELTA 1286
ELTA SAT 0146
EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246
FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186,
0296, 0846, 0956,
1306
FINLUX 0976
FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776
FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636,
1056
GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336
GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956,
0966
HIGH PERFORMANCE
0916
HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966
HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706,
0946
ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886
ITT 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156
ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156
JEEMON 0146
JERROLD 0846, 0986
JOHANSSON 0246
JVC 1276
KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276,
0366
KOSMOS 0266
KYOSTAR 1036, 1086
LENG 0246
LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356
LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446,
0466, 0506, 1156
MACAB 0356
MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256,
0956
MEDION 1326, 1346
METZ 0966
MICROMAXX 1326, 1346
MITSUBISHI 0966
MORGANS 0596
MURATTO 0406
NEC 0286, 0316, 0766,
0786, 0836
NETWORK 0046
NIKKO 1136, 1146
NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156, 1166,
1336
NORSAT 0786
OTTO VERSAND 0966
PACE 0046, 0176, 0296,
0936, 0956, 1306,
1566, 1576
PACE MSS 0946
PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK)
1526
PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706
PALSAT 0396
PALTEC 0706
PANASONIC 0806, 1306
PANSAT 1076
PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476,
0956, 1126, 1186,
1196, 1206, 1216,
1306, 1316
PROSAT 1176
PTT TELECOM 0306, 0896
QUELLE 0966
RADIX 1056
REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786
RFT 1186, 1196, 1206,
1216
SAGEM 1256, 1546
SAKURA 0566, 0816
SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136,
0446, 0456, 0486,
0496, 0576
SAMSUNG 0746, 0756
SAT 0406
SATCOM 0896
SATECO 0646
SECTOR 1266
SEDEA 1096
SENTRA 0416
SIEMENS 0896, 0966
SINTRACK 0906
SKYLAB 0476
SKYSCAN 0876
SONY 0736, 0946
STELLA 0306
STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036,
1086
STV 0636
TANDBERG 1116
TANDY 0916
TANTEC 0616
TATUNG 0516, 0546
TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526,
0556, 1056
TELECOM 0306
TELEMAX 0586
THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076,
0176, 0186,
0956
TOSHIBA 0946
TPS (FRANCE) 1546
TRIAD 0406
UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676,
0716, 0726
US ELECTRONICS 0886
VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076
VTECH 0436
WINERSAT 0246
WISI 0056, 0356, 0376,
0386, 0406, 0656,
1056, 1156
WOLSEY 0916
XCOM MULTIMEDIA 1556
XSAT (FRANCE) 1556
ZEHNDER 0266, 0406
ZENDER 0406
VCR
AIWA 0042, 0352, 0432
AKAI 0042, 0422, 0492,
0582, 0612, 0642,
0652, 0762, 0912
ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282,
0332, 0342, 0972
AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452
ANITECH 0002
ANITSCH 1002
ASA 0012, 0052
AUDIOSONIC 0002
BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492
BANG & OLUFSEN 0042
BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812
BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252,
0462, 0672, 0992
BRIONVEGA 0032
BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332,
0342, 0512, 0972
BUSH (UK) 0812
CAPEHART 0112
CGE 0042, 0432, 0762
CRAIG 0072, 0482
CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622
DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622
DANSAI 0012
DAYTRON 0112
DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432,
0942
DECCA (UK) 0052
DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432,
0532, 0602
DIXI 0442
DUAL 0042, 0632
DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532
DYNATECH 0432
DYNATRON 0012
ELBE 0122
ELIN 0072
EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202,
0432, 0512, 0522
ERRES 0012
FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722,
0852, 0902, 1012,
1022, 1082
FIDELITY 0432
FINLANDIA 0052, 0532
FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052,
0082, 0262, 0382,
0432, 0462, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0602,
0912
FIRST LINE 0002, 0912
FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532,
0542, 0572, 0592
FORMENTI-PHOENIX
0012, 0052
FRONTECH 0112
FUNAI 0432
GBC 0002
GEC (UK) 0022, 0052
GELOSO 0002
GENERAL TECHNIC 1172
GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812,
0952
GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282,
0432, 0502
GOODMANS (UK) 0002
GRAETZ 0022, 0042
GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532,
0572
iii
08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 1/23/1, 10:01 AM4
GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092,
0462, 0602,
0812, 0822
GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092,
0232, 0252, 0262,
0752, 0802
HANSEATIC 0052, 0812
HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922
HCM 0002
HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412,
0442, 0522
HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292,
0432, 0602, 0662,
0812, 1022
IMPERIAL 0072, 0432
INGERSOL 0442
INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072
INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172
INTERFUNK 0022, 0052
IRRADIO 0002, 0012
ITT 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762
ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762
JENSEN 0042
JVC (VICTOR) 0042, 0102, 0142,
0272, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0902
KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812
KENDO 0492
KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572
LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172
LLOYD 0432
LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152
LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442
LUMA 0162
LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812
M ELECTRONIC 0432
MAGNADYNE 0052
MAGNASONIC 0572
MANESTH 0012
MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092,
0122, 0502
MARK 0012
MARTA 0012
MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512,
0522, 0812, 0972
MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172
MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432,
0482, 0532, 0572
METZ 0062, 0092, 0932
MGA 0912
MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172
MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252
MINOLTA 0172, 0602
MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142,
0912, 0922
MTC 0072, 0432
MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062,
0282, 0432
MURPHY 0432
N.E.I. 0012, 0052
NATIONAL 0462
NEC 0042, 0122, 0142
NECKERMANN 0032, 0042,
0052, 0072,
0092, 0202,
0522, 0572,
0762, 0812
NIKKAI 0112
NOBLIKO 0092
NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762,
1152
NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142,
0192, 0222, 0242,
0392, 0402, 0632,
0732, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0792, 0832,
0842, 0872
OLYMPUS 0462
OPTONICA 0132, 0502
ORION 0162, 0202, 0312,
0442, 0512, 0522,
0982
OSAKA 0432
OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432
OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062,
0812
PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462,
0672, 0992, 1092,
1102, 1182
PENTAX 0172, 0602
PERDIO 0432
PHILCO 1062
PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092,
0152, 0182, 0362,
0372, 0382, 0472,
0502, 1072
PHONOLA 0052, 0152
PILOT 0012
PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372,
0472
PORTLAND 0112
PROLINE 0432
PYE 0052, 0152
QUARTZ 0572
QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042,
0052, 0062, 0072,
0092, 0202, 0462,
0522, 0942
RADIONETTE 0022
REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132,
0432, 0482, 0502,
0532, 0572
RET 1072
REX 0042, 0742, 0782
RICOH 0952
SABA 0042, 0142, 0192,
0222, 0242, 0392,
0632, 0732, 0742,
0762, 0772, 0782,
0792, 0872
SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292,
0442, 0512, 0522,
0972
SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812,
0822, 0912
SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622,
0652, 1192
SANSUI 0042, 0142
SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562,
0572
SBR 0052, 0152, 0182
SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042
SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052,
0072, 0432
SEG 0002, 0072
SEI-SINUDYNE 0442
SELECO 0042
SENTRA 0112
SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702
SHINTOM 0002
SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252,
0572
SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442,
0932
SONOKO 0282
SONY 0432, 0552, 0682,
0692, 0942, 0952,
0962, 1122, 1132
STS 0602
SUNKAI 0512
SUNSTAR 0432
SYLVANIA 0432, 0912
SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912
TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522,
0932
TASHIKO 0132, 0432
TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432,
0922
TCM 1142, 1162, 1172
TEAC 0042, 0432
TECHNICS 0462
TEKNIKA 0012, 0432
TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632,
0732, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0882, 0892
TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052
TENOSAL 0002
THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142,
0192, 0402, 0632,
0762
THORN 0042, 0902
THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222,
0302, 0712,
0722, 0742,
0762, 0852,
0862, 0872,
0902
TMK 0522
TONSAI 0002
TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912
TOTEVISION 0012, 0072
TRIUMPH 0922
UHER 0042, 0072
ULTRAVOX 0032
UNITECH 0072
VECTOR RESEARCH
0122
VIDEON 1162, 1172
WELTBLICK 0012
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0032
XENON 0162
YAMAHA 0042, 1202
YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072
DVD PLAYER
AKAI 0108\
DENON 0368
HITACHI 0388
JVC 0168, 0348
KENWOOD 0288
MAGNAVOX 0248
MITSUBISHI 0268
ONKYO 0128, 0248
PANASONIC 0048
PHILIPS 0188, 0248
PIONEER 0208, 0228
PROSCAN 0308
RCA 0308
SAMSUNG 0148
SHARP 0068
SONY 0028
TECHNICS 0048
THOMSON 0328
TOSHIBA 0088, 0248
YAMAHA 0008, 0048, 0188,
0248
ZENITH 0248
LD PLAYER
AIWA 0137
FUNAI 0137
HITACHI 0047
MAGNAVOX 0077
PANASONIC 0027
PIONEER 0037
RCA 0067
REALISTIC 0137
SAMSUNG 0017, 0087
SONY 0057, 0097, 0107,
0117
VICTOR 0127
YAMAHA 0007
CD PLAYER
ACCUPHASE 0315
ADC 0865
ADCOM 0785, 1015
AKAI 0115, 0125, 0725,
0735, 0745, 0935,
1155
ARCAM 1875
ARCAM-ROTEL 0165
AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835
AUDIOSONIC 0155
AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245,
1765, 1915, 1935
BSR 0875
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB
1075
CARRERA 0555, 0875
CARVER 0825, 1415
CYRUS-ROTEL 0205
DENON 0045, 0955, 1045,
1595, 1795, 1805
DUAL 1005
ELIN 0185
EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675
FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605,
0825, 1165, 1175
GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855,
0875, 0995, 1265,
1285, 1345, 1355,
1485, 1575, 1675,
1715, 1825
GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195,
1585
GRUNDIG 0175
HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495,
0565, 1135,
1145, 1155
HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685,
0945, 1005, 1015,
1225, 1545
INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015
ITT-NOKIA 0185
JVC (VICTOR) 0385, 0395, 0455,
0575, 0585
KARCHER 0485
KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145,
0215, 0595, 0675,
0695, 0705, 0715,
0925, 1355, 1485,
1575, 1675, 1715,
1825
KORTING 0175
LIFETEC 2015
LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645,
1655, 1665
LINN 0165, 1875
LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795,
0805, 1295, 1305,
1555, 1925
iv
08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 4/17/1, 2:12 PM5
LUXOR 0185, 1895, 1905
MAGNAVOX 1865, 1875
MARANTZ 0165, 0175, 0545,
0665, 1275, 1335,
1405, 1505, 1875,
1955
MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605
MCS 0535
MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005,
2015
MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265,
1275, 1285, 1675
MGA 1125
MICROMAXX 2015
MISSION 0165, 1875
MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205
NAD 0135, 0255, 0285,
0295, 0305, 0345,
0755, 0765, 1315,
1325
NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565
NEC 0405, 0535, 0775,
0785
NECKERMAN 0155, 0225
NIKKO 0835, 1165
OCEANIC 0185
OKANO 0155, 0225
ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425,
1455, 1515
PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615,
1625
PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195,
1865, 1875
PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425,
0435, 0445, 0525,
0855, 1035, 1945
PROTON 0905, 1875
QUASAR 1075
RADIOLA 1845, 1855
RADIOTONE 0485
REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265,
1275, 1285, 1575
ROTEL 1875
SABA 1005
SAE 1875
SALORA 0185
SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975,
0985, 1255, 1675,
1875
SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845,
0915
SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855
SCOTT 1285, 1675
SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025,
1115, 1275, 1635,
1785, 1815, 1825,
1835
SHERWOOD 1275, 1445
SIEMENS 1085
SIGNATURE 1155
SONY 0345, 0355, 0365,
0375, 0865, 1685,
1695, 1705, 1715,
1725, 1735, 1745
SYLVANIA 1875
TANDBERG 1885
TASHIKO 1525
TCM 1985, 2015
TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275,
1365, 1375, 1395,
1435, 1465, 1475
TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065,
1075, 1625
TELEFUNKEN 1005
THETA DIGITAL 1865
THOMSON 1005
TOSHIBA 0755, 0765
VECTOR RESEARCH
0555, 0865
YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085,
0345, 0615, 0655,
0815, 0835, 0895,
1815
CD RECORDER/CD-RW
HITACHI 0304
JVC 0334
MARANTZ 0314, 0324
PHILIPS 0274
PIONEER 0284, 0294
YAMAHA 0244
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0214
SHARP 0264
PIONEER 0254
SONY 0224
YAMAHA 0024, 0224, 0234
TAPE DECK
AKAI 0124
DENON 0204
GRUNDIG 0134
HARMAN 0044
JVC 0194
KENWOOD 0164
KORTING 0134
LUXMAN 0054, 0064, 0074,
0084
MARANTZ 0134, 0144
NAD 0174
ONKYO 0184
PHILIPS 0134, 0144, 0154
PIONEER 0034, 0114
SONY 0094, 0104
YAMAHA 0004, 0014
v
08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 1/23/1, 10:01 AM6
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia ID
V722690-1
DSP-AX620
Natural Sound AV Amplifier
Amplificateur audio-vidéo
G B
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
DSP-AX620
0100AX620(GB)-cv1/4 1/24/1, 11:01 AM1
SPEAKERS
MAIN
+
R L
A
+
B
CENTER
+
REAR
(SURROUND)
R
L
+
——
+
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV/CBL
YP
B
/C
B
P
R
/C
R
COMPONENT VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DVD
DVD
DVD
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
D-TV/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2
/DVR
OUT
VIDEO SIGNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
IN
VCR 1
OUT IN
VCR 2/DVR
OUT
OUT(REC)
IN(PLAY)
CD
PHONO
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
R
L
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
TUNER
SIGNAL
GND
MAIN
CENTER
SUB WOOFER
SURROUND
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT
CD
R
L
R
L
R
L
OUTPUT
MAIN
R
L
R
L
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
LR
AUDIO OUT S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
OPTICAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
V
V
AUDIO
OUT
S VIDEO IN
VIDEO IN
S VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
RLRL
DVD player
Main speakers A Main speakers B
RL
Rear speakers
Video signal
Optical signal
Signal flow
Center speaker
Subwoofer
system
Video Monitor
Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source)
L
R
V
Analog signal
(Europe model)
S Video signal
L R
S
S
O
O
S
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
*
Europe and U.K. models
only
*
V728170 DSP-AX620
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
u/d
Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R)
Quick Reference Card
TAPE/MD (CD-R)
AMP/TUN
DSP/TUN
INPUT
p Play
r Rec/Pause
(tape/MD)
DSP
b DIR A (tape)
Skip – (MD/CD-R)
w Rewind (tape)
Search (MD/CD-R)
Numeric buttons
p Play
DISC SKIP –/+
DSP
CD
b Skip –
w Search
INDEX
INPUT
+10
DISPLAY
e Pause
a Skip +
s Stop
f Search
AV POWER
PRESET –/+
DSP
DSP
A/B/C/D/E
6CH INPUT
6CH INPUT
j / i
Input
selector
buttons
DSP
program
group
buttons
EFFECT
INPUT
DSP
program
group
buttons
EFFECT
INPUT
SET MENU
STANDBY
TEST
Input
selector
buttons
LEVEL
ON SCREEN
TV POWER
TV VOLUME
TV INPUT
POWER
VOLUME +/–
SLEEP
MUTE
V728090
+10 (MD/CD-R)
Deck A/B (tape)
DISPLAY (MD/CD-R)
e Pause (MD/CD-R)
a DIR B (tape)
Skip + (MD/CD-R)
s Stop
f Fast
forward (tape)
Search (MD/CD-R)
AV POWER
INDEX (CD-R)
V620(Q)_Quick 1/16/1, 11:25 AM1
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Quick Reference Card
Press this button twice to start recording.
Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement.
Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten.
Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in.
V728090
*1 Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione.
Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar.
Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen.
DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD)
DSP
DVD/LD DVD MENU
CBL/SAT
TV
VCR
INDEX/Time (DVD)
Chapter/Time (LD)
INPUT
Numeric buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
+10
DISPLAY
e Pause
a Skip + (DVD)
Skip/Chapter + (LD)
s Stop
f Search
AV POWER
AV POWER
Numeric
buttons
AV POWER
Numeric buttons
AV POWER
p Play
b Skip – (DVD)
Skip/Chapter – (LD)
w Search
DISC SKIP –/+
Return
DSP
INDEX
+10
INPUT
DISPLAY
Menu up
Menu right
Menu down
MENU
Menu select
Menu left
TITLE
Ch enter/
Recall
INPUT
DISPLAY
_/_ _
e Pause
s Stop
f Fast
forward
p Play
w Rewind
TV INPUT
TV VOL +/–
TV
POWER
CH –/+
DSP
Ch enter/
Recall
_/_ _
INPUT
DISPLAY
VCR pause
VCR stop
VCR fast
forward
VCR power
TV SLEEP
TV MUTE
VCR play
VCR REC
VCR rewind
CH –/+
DSP
VCR REC
CH –/+
DSP
Ch enter
INPUT
_/_ _
DISPLAY/
Guide
(SAT)
Menu up
Menu
right
Menu
down
MENU
Menu
select
Menu left
Recall
*1
*1
V620(Q)_Quick 1/16/1, 11:25 AM2

Documenttranscriptie

GB DSP-AX620 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100AX620(GB)-cv1/4 1 DSP-AX620 Natural Sound AV Amplifier Amplificateur audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V722690 1/24/1, 11:01 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the right and left, and 10 cm at the back of this unit for ventilation space — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/ or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. II CAUTION II 0101AX620(GB)_Cau_EN 2 1/23/1, 9:25 AM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ADVANCED OPERATION FEATURES ............................................................ 2 GETTING STARTED ........................................... 3 Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ........................ 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP .............................................. 11 Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 11 Speaker Placement ................................................. 11 Before Connecting Components ............................ 12 Connecting Audio Components ............................. 12 Connecting Video Components .............................. 14 Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 16 Connecting an External Amplifier (Europe and U.K. models only) ....................................................... 18 Connecting an External Decoder ........................... 18 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ....................... 19 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ..................... 19 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 31 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 32 2 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) ........................................... 34 3 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 35 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 35 5 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 35 6 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) .................. 36 7 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) ................................ 36 8 SP DELAY TIME ............................................... 37 9 DISPLAY SET ................................................... 37 10MEMORY GUARD ........................................... 37 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ...................................................... 38 SLEEP TIMER .................................................... 39 Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 39 Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 39 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................. 40 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS ................................................. 12 SET MENU .......................................................... 31 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................... 4 Remote Control ........................................................ 6 Description of the Numeric Buttons ........................ 7 Using the Remote Control ........................................ 8 Front Panel Display .................................................. 9 Rear Panel .............................................................. 10 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Selector Dial ........................................................... 40 Commonly Used Buttons in Any Position of the Selector Dial ....................................................... 41 Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit ........................................................ 41 Button Names and Functions in Each Position ...... 42 Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 45 Returning to the Factory Setting ............................ 46 OSD Modes ............................................................ 20 Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 20 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................. 47 Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1E .................................................... 21 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 47 CINEMA DSP Programs ........................................ 47 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ......................................... 22 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ......................................................... 50 Before You Begin ................................................... 22 Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 22 What is a sound field? ............................................ 50 Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 50 Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 51 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 51 Sound Field Parameter Descriptions ...................... 52 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ......................... 21 BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ......................... 20 BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................... 24 Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26 Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 28 Normal Stereo Reproduction .................................. 29 BASIC RECORDING ......................................... 30 APPENDIX APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 55 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 59 GLOSSARY ......................................................... 60 INDEX .................................................................. 62 English 1 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 1 1/23/1, 9:25 AM FEATURES Built-in 5-Channel Power Amplifier Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) Main: 90 W + 90 W (8 Ω) Center: 90 W (8 Ω) Rear: 90 W + 90 W (8 Ω) ◆ Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and General models only] (10% THD, 1 kHz) Main: 115 W + 115 W (8 Ω) Center: 115 W (8 Ω) Rear: 115 W + 115 W (8 Ω) ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 10 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks ◆ Sleep Timer ◆ Remote Control with Preset Manufacturer Codes Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ DTS Decoder Dolby Pro Logic Decoder Dolby Digital Decoder Hi-Fi DSP CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 2 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 2 1/23/1, 9:25 AM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Remote control PREPARATION Quick Reference Card Quick Reference Card A/B/C/D/E BASIC OPERAIONT Connection guide 2 If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have been cleared. Note APPENDIX 1 As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the remote control decreases and the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these conditions, change all of the batteries. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. ■ Changing batteries ADVANCED OPERATION Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ■ Notes on batteries English • Change the batteries periodically. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. 3 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 3 1/23/1, 9:25 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 2 1 3 4 5 6 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + B ON DSP PROGRAM SET MENU – S VIDEO SILENT 8 9 EFFECT OFF PHONES 7 6CH INPUT INPUT 0 q + VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX erty w u 1 STANDBY/ON 5 VOLUME Turns on or sets this unit in the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 6 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 2 Remote control sensor 7 BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF Receives signals from the remote control. When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main speakers by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1D LFE/ BASS OUT” is set to SWFR. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 4 INPUT MODE Selects the mode of input for sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit (see page 26 for details). You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH INPUT as the input source. 4 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 4 1/23/1, 9:25 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 8 BASS e SET MENU Enters the SET MENU. 9 TREBLE r Multi jog knob Selects and adjust the SET MENU item after pressing SET MENU. Selects the DSP program after pressing DSP PROGRAM. Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right main speakers. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the high-frequency response. t DSP PROGRAM Switches the function of the multi jog knob for selecting DSP program. Note 0 SPEAKERS A/B When pushed in (ON), these buttons turn on the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the speakers. y BASIC OPERAIONT q PHONES jack u INPUT l / h Selects the input source (CD, TUNER, MD/CD-R, DVD, D-TV/CBL, VCR 1, PHONO, V-AUX, VCR 2/DVR) you want to listen to or watch. PREPARATION • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. y EFFECT Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off. If you turn off the output of these speakers by using EFFECT, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the main left and right channels. When Dolby Digital or DTS signals are mixed, the left and right main channel signal levels may not match. INTRODUCTION Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right main speakers. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the low-frequency response. (Europe and U.K. models only) • When you connect headphones, no signals are also output to the OUTPUT jacks. ADVANCED OPERATION w VIDEO AUX jacks Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 5 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 5 1/23/1, 9:25 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes the basic operation of this unit with the remote control. First, set the selector dial to the AMP/ TUN position. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” for full details. 3 Numeric buttons (Input selector buttons) These buttons select the input source. See “Description of the Numeric Buttons” for the numeric buttons. 4 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. 1 2 0 q Select the AMP/TUN position. w 5 TEST Outputs the test tone. 6 ON SCREEN Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor. 7 j / i (–/+) Adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items. –/+ is displayed on the on-screen display. 3 8 LEVEL EFFECT 4 Selects the effect speaker channel (center, rear and subwoofer) so you can adjust their output level independently. 9 SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. 5 6 e r 7 0 INPUT Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the input selector. A/B/C/D/E q Indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 8 TV POWER TV VOLUME 9 t w Selector dial y u Turn this dial to select the position for the component to be controlled. (The proper code must be set up for your component. See “Setting the Manufacture Codes”.) When a position is selected, the remote control is set to that component operation mode. i e A/B/C/D/E, PRESET –/+ TV INPUT o These buttons are used to select a preset station when using YAMAHA tuner. A/B/C/D/E: To select one of 5 preset station groups (A to E) PRESET –/+: To select a preset station number (1 to 8) r u/d Select DSP program parameters and SET MENU items. 1 DSP Switches the function of the numeric buttons to the DSP program selector. t SET MENU Enters the SET MENU. 2 Indicator window y POWER Shows the name of components which can be controlled. Turns on the power of this unit. u STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 6 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 6 1/23/1, 9:25 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS i VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. o MUTE ■ When selecting a DSP program and turning on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) A INTRODUCTION Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. B EFFECT Switches the effect speakers (center and rear) on and off in the following cases: • When the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position. • While the indicator is lit for about 3 seconds after pressing DSP. The numeric buttons function in various ways depending on the position of the selector dial or the combination of other instructions. PREPARATION DSP program group buttons Description of the Numeric Buttons EFFECT A Press DSP regardless of the position of the selector dial. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. 2 You can select a DSP program with the numeric buttons and turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing EFFECT while the indicator is lit. ■ When selecting an input source BASIC OPERAIONT 1 B 6CH INPUT Press INPUT regardless of the position of the selector dial. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. 2 You can select an input source with the numeric buttons and 6CH INPUT while the indicator is lit. Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN position. 2 You can select a DSP program directly with the numeric buttons and turn on or off the effect speakers (center and rear) by pressing EFFECT. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 1 ADVANCED OPERATION Input selector buttons APPENDIX English 7 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 7 1/23/1, 9:26 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the Remote Control D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND – + – + 30° Approximately 6 m (20 feet) 30° The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. 8 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 8 1/23/1, 9:26 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel Display 2 3 VIRTUAL PCM VCR2/DVR VCR 1 DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DTS D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER dB ms 8 7 1 t indicator Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on. Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP. 3 g and o indicators Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit is reproducing. “ g ” lights up when the builtin Dolby Digital decoder is on. “ o ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. Shows the current input source with a cursor. 5 x indicator Lights up when you select a DSP program. 6 v indicator 9 0 q 7 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 8 DSP program indicators The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or q/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. 9 Multi-information display Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. ADVANCED OPERATION 4 Input source indicator VOLUME BASIC OPERAIONT 2 VIRTUAL indicator PHONO SLEEP SP AB 6 CD MOVIE THEATER 1 2 ENTERTAINMENT PREPARATION 5 4 V-AUX DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP INTRODUCTION 1 0 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. q SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. APPENDIX English 9 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 9 1/23/1, 9:26 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 1 2 3 DIGITAL INPUT CD 4 5 6 DVD GND R + – SPEAKERS 7 – + 8 L TUNER MAINS A D-TV/CBL L COAXIAL MAIN OPTICAL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER AC OUTLETS MONITOR OUT R D-TV/CBL DVD D-TV/CBL Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT /DVR B OUTPUT VIDEO CENTER R R SUB WOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL R L R REAR (SURROUND) L – S VIDEO OPTICAL MD/CD-R R MAIN + MD/CD-R + – – + CENTER L SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON L REAR (SURROUND) R DIGITAL OUTPUT 9 PHONO CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL OUT VCR 1 IN OUT VCR 2/DVR MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER SUB WOOFER OUTPUT 0 MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER q w (Europe model) 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks 8 AC power cord 2 DIGITAL INPUT jacks Connect to a power outlet. 9 AC OUTLET(S) 3 GND terminal See page 12 for connection information. Use these outlets to supply power to your other audio/ video components (see page 19). 4 6CH INPUT jacks 0 Audio component jacks See page 18 for connection information. 5 Video component jacks See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. 6 Speaker terminals See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. 7 OUTPUT jacks (Europe and U.K. models only) See page 18 for connection information. See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. q SUBWOOFER jack See page 17 for connection information. w IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch (see page 19). China and General models only VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 19. 10 0102AX620(GB)_1-10_EN 10 1/23/1, 9:26 AM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m Center speaker Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the floor. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case, “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. ■ Subwoofer CAUTION 11 0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 11 1/23/1, 9:26 AM English Please use magnetically shielded speakers. Sometimes a video monitor may be adversely affected even when magnetically shielded speakers are used. Separate the speakers from the monitor if this happens. APPENDIX The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Rear speaker (R) ADVANCED OPERATION The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. Main speaker (R) BASIC OPERATION The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. PREPARATION This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 5-speaker system, using left and right main speakers, left and right rear speakers, and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer to ensure even tonal quality. Speaker Placement INTRODUCTION Speakers to Be Used CONNECTIONS Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, @, # etc. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks ■ Connecting a tuner This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. You can listen to an FM or AM broadcasting by connecting AM/FM tuner. To get clearer reception, connect the antennas correctly. Refer to your tuner’s operation instrustions for details. y • You can designate the input for each digital jack according to your component by using “4 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU. About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a turntable ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL jack is available for a CD player which has a coaxial digital output jack. • When you connect a CD player to both the analog and digital jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the digital jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, CD recorder or tape deck y • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • Since digital output and analog output (REC OUT) are independent of each other, the analog signal is output only to the analog jack, while the digital signal is output only to the digital jack. PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. y • The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It simply reduces noise in the signal. In some cases, you may hear less noise if you do not connect to the GND terminal. 12 0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 12 1/23/1, 9:26 AM CONNECTIONS SUBWOOFER OUTPUT MAIN OUTPUT OUTPUT CD player AM/FM Tuner External decoder INTRODUCTION COAXIAL OUTPUT L C R L L R R R L SURROUND OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT CD CENTER OUTPUT DVD GND TUNER D-TV/CBL PREPARATION L COAXIAL OPTICAL MONITOR OUT R D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD D-TV/CBL Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT /DVR VIDEO MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL OPTICAL MD/CD-R BASIC OPERATION L R DIGITAL OUTPUT (Europe model) PHONO IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R R IN DVD D-TV/CBL AUDIO SIGNAL O OUT VCR 1 L R IN OUT VCR 2/DVR L SUB WOOFER OUTPUT O R ADVANCED OPERATION L CD GND INPUT OUTPUT OPTICAL INPUT OUTPUT MD recorder or CD recorder OPTICAL OUTPUT Turntable ADDITIONAL INFORMATION indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX English 13 0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 13 1/23/1, 9:26 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting Video Components ■ About the video jacks There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composit video signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals. The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) video signals. The jacks are also separated into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction. If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. y VIDEO jack (composite) S VIDEO jack Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO jacks • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively. • If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary to make composite video connections. If both types of connections are made, this unit gives priority to the S-video signal. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according to your component by using “4 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU. Notes • Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being connected. ■ Video monitor with a 21-pin connector (Europe and U.K. models only) Make a connection as shown on page 15 with a commercially available SCART-plug connector cable. ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console to this unit. OPTICAL VIDEO AUX S V L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT Game console 14 0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 14 1/23/1, 9:26 AM CONNECTIONS SCART-plug (Europe and U.K. models only) Monitor OPTICAL OUTPUT COMPONENT COMPONENT OUTPUT INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT O S VIDEO OUTPUT L R S VIDEO INPUT VIDEO OUTPUT V S INTRODUCTION DVD player VIDEO INPUT V S L V R No connection GND TUNER D-TV/CBL L COAXIAL OPTICAL MONITOR OUT R D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L CENTER DVD (Europe model) Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT /DVR D-TV/CBL VIDEO PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT CD DVD MD/CD-R S VIDEO R SUB WOOFER BASIC OPERATION R VIDEO SIGNAL OPTICAL MD/CD-R L R PHONO DIGITAL OUTPUT CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN OPTICAL OUTPUT SUB WOOFER OUTPUT V L R L R TV/digital TV or cable TV/ satellite tuner S VIDEO INPUT S VIDEO OUTPUT L R S S V ADVANCED OPERATION S IN OUT VCR 2/DVR AUDIO INPUT VIDEO COMPONENT S VIDEO OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT O OUT VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD AUDIO SIGNAL V VCR 1 or VCR 2/ DVR (digital video VIDEO OUTPUT recorder) AUDIO OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables S indicates S-video cables 0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 15 1/23/1, 9:26 AM English 15 APPENDIX When using an LD player Connect the LD player output to the DVD jack. If the LD player has an OPTICAL digital output jack, connect it to this unit’s OPTICAL DVD jack. If it has analog jacks, connect it to the analog DVD jacks. If it has an “RF OUTPUT jack” to output a Dolby Digital RF signal (AC-3), use a commercially available RF demodulator and connect it to the OPTICAL DVD jack. If connecting a DVD player and an LD player, connect the LD player to the digital input jack (ex. D-TV/CBL) or to the analog input jack (D-TV/CBL, VCR 1 or VCR 2/DVR). For details on connections and operations, refer to the operation instructions for the LD player. Note that this unit’s remote control can be used to operate the LD player by setting the corresponding manufacturer code for the DVD/LD position. CONNECTIONS Connecting the Speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 2 ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 2 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. 3 y (China and General models only) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or B terminals. ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 16 0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 16 1/23/1, 9:26 AM CONNECTIONS Main speakers B Main speakers A Left Right INTRODUCTION Right Left (Europe model) D + – SPEAKERS + – L MAINS A /CBL PREPARATION R MAIN AC OUTLETS TOR T B OMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT VIDEO CENTER + L R REAR (SURROUND) L – S VIDEO + – + – BASIC OPERATION R R MAIN SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL CENTER IMPEDANCE SELECTOR L SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 :8 :8 CENTER REAR REAR (SURROUND) MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 :6 :6 SUB WOOFER OUTPUT CENTER REAR MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER ADVANCED OPERATION Right Center speaker Rear speakers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Subwoofer system Left ■ SUBWOOFER jack APPENDIX When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes English • Adjust the subwoofer volume according to the operating instructions for the subwoofer. (Fine adjustment is possible using this unit’s output level control of the effect speakers.) • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “6 DOLBY D. SET” and “7 DTS SET” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 17 0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 17 1/23/1, 9:26 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting an External Amplifier (Europe and U.K. models only) If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the OUTPUT jacks as follows. Note • When RCA pin plugs are connected to the OUTPUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, do not use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes OUTPUT R L R REAR (SURROUND) L MAIN 1 2 3 CENTER Connecting an External Decoder • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items 1A to 1E on the SET MENU is not affected. 1 MAIN jacks Main channel line output jacks. Note • The signals output through these jacks are affected by the BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION settings. 2 REAR (SURROUND) jacks Rear channel line output jacks. 3 CENTER jacks Center channel line output jacks. 18 0103AX620(GB)_11-18_EN 18 1/23/1, 9:26 AM CONNECTIONS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch Select the left or right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. Switch Speaker position VOLTAGE SELECTOR Impedance level If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Main AC OUTLETS Center If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Left SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 REAR :8 MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER Main MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. Right VOLTAGE SELECTOR If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. ADVANCED OPERATION IMPEDANCE SELECTOR BASIC OPERAIONT IMPEDANCE SELECTOR PREPARATION (General model) INTRODUCTION WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. Connecting the Power Supply Cords ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) MAINS AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL APPENDIX Europe, China and General models ............. 2 OUTLETS U.K. model ..................................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords only from your audio/video components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W. (Europe model) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you will not use this unit for a long period of time. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 REAR :8 MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER To AC outlet English MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR SWITCHED 19 0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 19 1/23/1, 9:26 AM ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. Selecting the OSD Mode 1 When you turn on the power, the video monitor and front panel display show the level of the main volume for a few seconds and then switch to show the current DSP program. 2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. y • If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “9 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU. OSD Modes You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Full display This mode always shows the DSP program parameter settings on the video monitor. Short display This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Display off This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button. P01 CONCERT HALL INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS 45ms 1.0 5 Notes • If you choose a video input source that has a component connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks. However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video and composite video signals. • If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. P01 CONCERT HALL Full display Short display y • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front panel display. • The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. 20 0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 20 1/23/1, 9:26 AM SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS Before use, please set the speaker mode setting using “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU described on page 32. Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1E Control value (default setting indicated in bold) Description Selects the output mode according to whether or not a center speaker is being used and its performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1B MAIN SP Selects the output mode according to the performance of the main speakers. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR L/R SP Selects the output mode according to whether or not rear L/R speakers are being used and their performance. LRG/SML/NONE 1D LFE/BASS OUT Selects the speaker according to use for LFE signal output and low bass signal. 1E MAIN LEVEL Selects the main speaker level. BASIC OPERAIONT 1A CENTER SP PREPARATION Item INTRODUCTION This unit is equipped with a main amplifier capable of handling 5.1 channel. Although up to 6 speakers can be connected, it is possible to select the speaker mode that gives the best sound field effect according to the number and size of speakers being used. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH Normal/–10 dB ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 21 0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 21 1/23/1, 9:26 AM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS This section explains how to adjust the speaker output levels by using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position with the remote control. Note A/B/C/D/E 2,6 1 • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. 5 4 Before You Begin 3 1 A/B/C/D/E VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + B ON 1 2 3 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 2 Press TEST to output the test tone. 3 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard from the left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. 6CH INPUT INPUT EFFECT OFF S VIDEO SILENT 3 DSP PROGRAM SET MENU PHONES 3 1 SURROUND STANDBY /ON – + VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power. Turn on the video monitor. STANDBY /ON Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A ON B LEFT RIGHT (TEST LEFT) (TEST RIGHT) OFF Set BASS and TREBLE on the front panel to the center position and set BASS EXTENSION to OFF. BASS EXTENSION ON BASS OFF – Set to OFF. + CENTER (TEST CENTER) TREBLE – + LEFT SURROUND (TEST L SUR.) 22 0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 22 1/23/1, 9:26 AM RIGHT SURROUND (TEST R SUR.) ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT CONNECTIONS LEVELS The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. • For details on adjusting the subwoofer speaker, refer to the effect speaker level adjustment described on page 38. • After adjusting with the test tone, it is possible to adjust the speaker level to taste while listening to the playback of an actual source when using the effect speaker level adjustment described on page 38. y LEFT y Note • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. 4 BASIC OPERAIONT Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker to be adjusted. y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker to be adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in the reverse order.) When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. The test tone stops and the current DSP program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. APPENDIX 6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press j / i repeatedly to adjust the output level of the currently selected speaker so that it becomes almost the same as that of the main speaker. • While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. • Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the output levels of the center, left rear and right rear speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION 5 PREPARATION • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. • You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers (center, left rear and right rear) to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1E MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1E MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. INTRODUCTION TEST DOLBY SUR. Notes English 23 0104AX620(GB)_19-23_EN 23 1/23/1, 9:26 AM BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK When using the remote control, set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position. 1 6 5 VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + B ON DSP PROGRAM SET MENU Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons) to select the input source. • The current input source is indicated on the front panel display with a cursor. • The current input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor for a few seconds. 6CH INPUT INPUT EFFECT OFF – PHONES S VIDEO + VIDEO SILENT 5 3 L AUDIO R INPUT OPTICAL or VIDEO AUX 3 2 Front panel 6 Remote control A/B/C/D/E V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL 1 3 5 STANDBY /ON Front panel 2 Remote control Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. PHONO: CD: TUNER: MD/CD-R: DVD: D-TV/CBL: VCR 1: VCR 2/DVR: or SPEAKERS A ON 24 CD PHONO V-AUX: To reproduce the signal from this component Turntable CD player AM/FM tuner MD recorder/CD recorder/tape deck DVD player TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner Video cassette deck 1 Video cassette deck 2/digital video recorder Another audio/video component (connected to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel) B OFF Front panel 24 0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN TUNER Selected input source Select this: Press STANDBY/ON (or POWER) to turn on the power. Turn on the video monitor. The front panel display and the video monitor show the level of the main volume for a few seconds and then switch to show the current DSP program. MD/CD-R VOLUME A/B/C/D/E 1 DVD 1/23/1, 9:26 AM BASIC PLAYBACK 6 Use the digital sound field processor. See “Selecting a Sound Field Program”. DSP PROGRAM INTRODUCTION To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. 6CH INPUT or – Front panel + Front panel or Remote control Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. 5 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME Remote control If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION etc. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. – Press MUTE on the remote control. To restore the audio output to the previous volume level, press MUTE again. y • You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as VOLUME +/–. • During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. + TREBLE – + Front panel Note ■ Notes on the digital signal The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: 1. The following indication will appear on the front panel display. V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME PCM 2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. APPENDIX • If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT and MD/CD-R OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered. In these cases, turn on the component. Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set this unit in the standby mode. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASS OFF Use this when you want to temporarily mute audio output. ADVANCED OPERATION Front panel ON ■ To mute the sound ■ When you have finished using this unit or BASS EXTENSION Remote control BASIC OPERATION 4 PREPARATION Notes • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. • If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press 6CH INPUT. Note 3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on page 38 cannot be made. 25 0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 25 1/23/1, 9:27 AM English • If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1D LFE/BASS OUT” is set to SWFR, or “1D LFE/BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. BASIC PLAYBACK ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) Select a source from the video group and then select a source from the audio group with the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does not work if you select the sources with INPUT l / h on the front panel. AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANLG (ANALOG): In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. Notes Input Modes and Indications When using the remote control, set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN position. This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the priority of the input signal. Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor. • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is selected. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source. • The sound output may be interrupted for some LD players and DVD players in the following situation: When the input mode has been set to AUTO and a search is performed while playing the source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the sound may delay for a moment when playback is resumed. • Depending on the LD player, playback may not be made when playing an LD that is not digitally recorded with the input mode set to AUTO. If this happens, set the input mode to ANALOG. INPUT MODE or Front panel V-AUX VCR2/DVR Remote control VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME Input mode 26 0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 26 1/23/1, 9:27 AM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on playing a source encoded with a DTS signal INTRODUCTION • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • The following phenomena may occur if the input mode is set to AUTO when playing back source encoded with a DTS signal. – If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit automatically switches to the “DTSdecoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up on the front panel display.) The “t” indicator may flash immediately after playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is flashing. (The indicator will flash for less than a minute.) If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – The “t” indicator may flash when a search or skip operation is performed. If this status continues for a certain length of time, the unit will automatically switch from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out. PREPARATION BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 27 0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 27 1/23/1, 9:27 AM BASIC PLAYBACK Selecting a Sound Field Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see “SOUND FIELD PROGRAM”. ■ On the front panel VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE ■ On the remote control BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + ON B 6CH INPUT INPUT EFFECT OFF PHONES 1 DSP PROGRAM SET MENU S VIDEO SILENT – + VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 1 2 A/B/C/D/E 1 Press DSP. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. y Press DSP PROGRAM. 2 Turn the multi jog knob to select the program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. DSP PROGRAM – + Notes • If the selector dial is set to the DSP/TUN position, skip this step. 2 1 Use the numeric buttons to select the desired program before the indicator goes off. • For example, to select the sub-program “SPECTACLE”, press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly. • The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. Program group V-AUX DIGITAL VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. PHONO MOVIE THEATER 1 DSP VOLUME Program name (sub-program) 28 0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 28 1/23/1, 9:27 AM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA Normal Stereo Reproduction EFFECT Front panel Remote control y Note Notes • If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the center and rear speakers. • If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effect or if you set “6 D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. ADVANCED OPERATION SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy the realistic feel of the DSP program while using headphones. This feature delivers powerful surround reproduction just as if listening through the speakers. • If the selector dial is set to a position other than the DSP/TUN position, first press DSP and then EFFECT on the remote control. BASIC OPERATION • This unit is not set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases: – when the 5CH STEREO, PRO LOGIC/NORMAL, DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL or DTS/NORMAL program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones (you will hear SILENT CINEMA). PREPARATION The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by using the main speakers. or INTRODUCTION Press EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the sound field effects of the DSP program without rear speakers. Using YAMAHA original technology, natural surround reproduction is possible through the generation of a virtual speaker. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the effect speakers are on. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 29 0105AX620(GB)_24-29_EN 29 1/23/1, 9:27 AM BASIC RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. VOLUME D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON INPUT MODE BASS EXTENSION ON OFF BASS TREBLE SPEAKERS A – + – + ON B DSP PROGRAM SET MENU 6CH INPUT INPUT EFFECT OFF – PHONES S VIDEO SILENT + VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 2 2 If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. A/B/C/D/E 1 2 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, VOLUME, “2 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. Turn on the power to the unit and all connected component. Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT or Remote control Front panel 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded. Set the DVD player (or CD player) as described in the player’s operation instructions so that the audio signals are output from the player’s analog outputs. 30 0106AX620(GB)_30_EN 30 1/23/1, 9:27 AM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU INTRODUCTION The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the speaker mode setting features. Use the SET MENU to enjoy the optimum audio/video playback for your system. Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU y Adjustment should be made with the remote control. A/B/C/D/E 1 3,6 4,5 2 PREPARATION • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting the items. Note • The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of the OSD. 1 SPEAKER SET 1A CENTER SP A/B/C/D/E Notes 1C REAR L/R SP 1E MAIN LEVEL 1 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. 2 L/R BALANCE 3 HP TONE CTRL 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT ADVANCED OPERATION 1D LFE/BASS OUT • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. • SET MENU and the multi jog knob on the front panel can also be used to make these adjustments. SET MENU 1/3 4A CMPNT-V INPUT 1 SPEAKER SET 2 L/R BALANCE 3 HP TONE CTRL 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT / : Up/Down –/+ : Enter 4B OPTICAL OUT 4C OPTICAL IN BASIC OPERAIONT 1B MAIN SP 4D COAXIAL IN 3 6 DOLBY D. SET Press u/d repeatedly to select the item (1 to 10) you want to adjust. LFE LEVEL SET MENU 1/3 1 SPEAKER SET 2 L/R BALANCE 3 HP TONE CTRL 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT / : Up/Down –/+ : Enter D-RANGE 7 DTS SET 8 SP DELAY TIME • By pressing SET MENU (or SET MENU on the front panel) repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. BLUE BACK OSD SHIFT APPENDIX y 9 DISPLAY SET ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 5 INPUT MODE DIMMER 10 MEMORY GUARD English 31 0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 31 1/23/1, 9:27 AM SET MENU 4 Press j or i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the video monitor or on the front panel display. 4A CMPNT-V INPUT [A] • • • • • DVD [B] • • • • • D-TV/CBL Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items again. y • When making adjustments through the front panel, turn the multi jog knob one step to either the left or the right to enter setup mode for the selected item. Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. 4B OPTICAL OUT (1) • • • • • MD/CD-R y • When making adjustments through the front panel, press SET MENU. 5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. 4A CMPNT-V INPUT [A] • • • • • VCR 1 [B] • • • • • D-TV/CBL 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. Notes • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items 1B and 1D are possible, but those in items 1A,1C and 1E are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1E are not affected. ■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker mode) By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, the unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG y • When making adjustments through the front panel, turn the multi jog knob to change the settings. 6 Press u/d repeatedly until the current DSP program appears or simply press one of the DSP program group button to exit from the SET MENU. LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE or y • When operating through the front panel, press SET MENU repeatedly until the DSP program name appears to exit from the SET MENU. SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS OUT”. 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE 32 0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 32 1/23/1, 9:27 AM SET MENU 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending on how you set this item. 1C REAR L/R SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LRG SML NONE 1B MAIN SP SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS OUT”. 1C REAR L/R SP SMALL ADVANCED OPERATION SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D LFE/BASS OUT”. LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have rear speakers. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1C REAR L/R SP 1B MAIN SP LARGE BASIC OPERATION LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. LARGE PREPARATION ■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode) ■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker mode) INTRODUCTION NONE Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signals are directed to the left and right main speakers. LRG SML NONE SMALL y Note APPENDIX • When you select MAIN for “1D LFE/BASS OUT”, the lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. • This unit is set in the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”. English 33 0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 33 1/23/1, 9:27 AM SET MENU ■ 1D LFE/BASS OUT (bass out mode) ■ 1E MAIN LEVEL (main level mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Choices: Normal, –10 dB Initial setting: Normal Normal Normally select this setting. 1D LFE/BASS OUT SWFR 1E MAIN LEVEL MAIN BOTH MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. 1D LFE/BASS OUT Normal –10dB –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. 1E MAIN LEVEL SWFR MAIN BOTH BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. 1D LFE/BASS OUT SWFR MAIN BOTH Normal –10dB 2 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the left and right main speakers. Control range: 10 for L/R Initial setting: 0 Notes • When playing a 2-channel source (CD, MD, tape, video cassette etc.), select the BOTH position to direct low bass signals (below 90 Hz) to the SUBWOOFER jack. • When you select SMALL (SML) for items 1A, 1B and 1C, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from those channels are added to the LFE and output to the subwoofer. Press i to decrease the output level for the left main speaker. Press j for the right main speaker. 2 L/R BALANCE L • • • • • • • • • • II • • • • • • • • • • R 0 –/+ / : Adjust : Exit Note • The L/R BALANCE setting also applies to when headphones are being used. 34 0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 34 1/23/1, 9:27 AM SET MENU 3 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Initial settings: (2) MD/CD-R (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. ■ 4C OPTICAL IN (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) 4C OPTICAL IN Control range (dB): –6 to +3 Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) (2) • • • • • MD/CD-R (3) • • • • • DVD (4) • • • • • D-TV/CBL 3 HP TONE CTRL 0dB + ■ 4D COAXIAL IN (for the COAXIAL INPUT jack) Initial setting: (5) CD 4 I/O ASSIGNMENT 4D COAXIAL IN (5) • • • • • Initial settings: [A] DVD [B] D-TV/CBL 4A CMPNT-V INPUT [A] • • • • • DVD [B] • • • • • D-TV/CBL Initial setting: (1) MD/CD-R 5 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode when turning on the power of this unit with the source component connected to more than one type of input jacks. Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO 5 INPUT MODE AUTO –/+ / 4B OPTICAL OUT (1) • • • • • MD/CD-R ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ 4B OPTICAL OUT (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT jack) Note • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ 4A CMPNT-V INPUT (for the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) CD BASIC OPERATION It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). PREPARATION BASS TRBL – LAST : Select : Exit LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. APPENDIX AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. English 35 0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 35 1/23/1, 9:27 AM SET MENU MAX Output level 6 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. Dialog level 6 DOLBY D. SET Input level LFE LEVEL • • • • 0dB D-RANGE • • • MAX STD MIN ■ LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the lowfrequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control value (dB): –20 to 0 Initial setting: 0 dB Notes • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. • Normally, around –6 dB to –8 dB is most suitable for listening at home. ■ D-RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range (the difference between the maximum level and the minimum level of sounds). Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN Initial setting: MAX • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low volume level. Dialog level H-LEVEL CUT 0.0 1.0 1.0 Output level : Adjust : Select Output level –/+ / MIN STD Dialog level 0.0 L-LEVEL BST Input level Input level Note • When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD. 7 DTS SET (DTS LFE level) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control range (dB): –10 to +10 Initial setting: 0 dB 7 DTS SET LFE LEVEL • • • • 0dB –/+ / : Adjust : Exit Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer. 36 0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 36 1/23/1, 9:27 AM SET MENU 8 SP DELAY TIME 9 DISPLAY SET BLUE BACK • • • AUTO OSD SHIFT • • • • • • 0 DIMMER • • • • • • • • • • 0 ■ BLUE BACK ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) 8 SP DELAY TIME This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. BASIC OPERATION CENTER • • • • • • 0ms Control range: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) Initial setting: 0 : Adjust : Exit PREPARATION Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a blue background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed on the screen including the onscreen display if OFF is selected. Initial setting: AUTO Control range (ms): 0 to 5 Initial setting: 0 ms –/+ / 9 DISPLAY SET INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sound. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right main speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialog. Press i to lower the position of the OSD. Press j to raise the position of the OSD. Center speaker image ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. C ADVANCED OPERATION L R C Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 10 MEMORY GUARD RR RL Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF y 10 MEMORY GUARD • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speaker about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the actual position of the center speaker. OFF –/+ / ON : Select : Exit APPENDIX Select ON to protect the following features: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers and subwoofer levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode 37 37 1/23/1, 9:27 AM English Notes • When “10 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “10 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. 0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, left and right rear and subwoofer) while listening to a music source. Adjustment should be made with the remote control. A/B/C/D/E 1 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or left and right rear speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. 3 2 Notes • If the speaker output mode is set to NONE, the output level of that speaker cannot be adjusted. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • To adjust speakers other than the subwoofer, the adjusting procedure using the test tone on page 22 is recommended. A/B/C/D/E 1 Set the selector dial to the AMP/TUN (or DSP/TUN) position. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear, left rear and subwoofer. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the output level of the effect speakers you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the output level again. Center speaker output level CENTER Right rear speaker output level Left rear speaker output level R SUR. L SUR. Subwoofer output level SWFR y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d. (Pressing u changes the selection in the reverse order.) 38 0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 38 1/23/1, 9:27 AM SLEEP TIMER 4 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO DIGITAL SLEEP DSP VOLUME The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. A/B/C/D/E 2 y A/B/C/D/E 2 Set the selector dial to a position other than the TV position. 3 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time before this unit automatically turns off. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. 120 90 60 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select a source and start playback on the source component. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. 30 The SLEEP timer is off (SLEEP OFF). (This is the state before SLEEP is pressed.) V-AUX VCR2/DVR VCR 1 D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO APPENDIX DIGITAL SLEEP DSP BASIC OPERAIONT 3 PREPARATION Canceling the Sleep Timer Setting the Sleep Timer INTRODUCTION Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). VOLUME English 39 0107AX620(GB)_31-39_EN 39 1/23/1, 9:28 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES It is possible to control this unit and other YAMAHA A/V components using the remote control supplied with this unit. It is also possible to control components from other manufacturers (or some YAMAHA components) by setting the proper manufacturer code (a signal assigned to each manufacturer and component). Note • For the notes on batteries, operating distance and names and functions of the remote control, refer to each description in this manual. Selector Dial Select the component (position) to be controlled by the remote control. For example, if the CD position is selected, the remote control is set in the CD operation mode, allowing the CD player to be controlled. When turning the selector dial, the position changes as follows: AMP/TUN You can perform the basic operations of this unit. TAPE/MD The code for a YAMAHA MD recoder is factoryset. Be sure to set the proper code when operating a CD recorder or tape deck. CD The code for a YAMAHA CD player is factory-set. CBL/SAT A cable TV or satellite tuner can be controlled. VCR A VCR can be controlled. Selector dial DVD/LD & DVD MENU An LD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD position. A DVD player can be controlled in the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions. The code for a YAMAHA DVD player is factory-set. TV A TV can be controlled. DSP/TUN This unit can be controlled and DSP programs can be selected directly. Notes • The general operational buttons on the remote control differ depending on the position of the selector dial. See the following pages for details. • When shipped from the factory, the YAMAHA manufacturer codes listed on page 46 are set for each dial position. If unable to operate your YAMAHA A/V component, please try using another YAMAHA code. 40 0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 40 1/23/1, 9:28 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Commonly Used Buttons in Any Position of the Selector Dial INTRODUCTION Regardless of the position of the selector dial, you can control this unit and your TV with the following buttons. Controlling the Components Connected to This Unit The example below describes the procedure for controlling a YAMAHA CD player. Note # 3 2 6 PREPARATION 2 5 3 4 1 ! @ A/B/C/D/E 1 • You have to set up the code for your TV in the TV position before you can control the TV. A/B/C/D/E 4 5 Turn on the power. 3 Press INPUT. The indicator lights up for about 3 seconds. 4 Press CD while the indicator is lit. 5 Press p. See “Button Names and Functions in Eash Position” for the CD player operation buttons. 6 Adjust the volume. See “Remote Control”. 1 2 3 4 STANDBY POWER VOLUME +/– SLEEP Note • If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial to the TV position, this button is used to set the sleep timer for the TV. 5 MUTE Note • If you have set up the code for your TV and set the selector dial to the TV position, this button is used to mute the TV sound. ■ Controlling your TV If you set the remote control with the manufacturer codes listed from page i at the end of this manual, you can control other brands of components. See “Setting the Manufacturer Codes” for details. APPENDIX ! TV POWER @ TV INPUT # TV VOLUME +/– ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 ADVANCED OPERATION Set the selector dial to the CD position. BASIC OPERAIONT ■ Controlling this unit 1 English 41 0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 41 1/23/1, 9:28 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Button Names and Functions in Each Position ■ TAPE/MD position (tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder) Select the TAPE/MD position. Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R) INDEX (CD-R) r Rec/Pause (tape/MD) e Pause (MD/CD-R) A/B/C/D/E p Play b DIR A (tape) This button selects the playing direction of deck A. Skip – (MD/CD-R) +10 (MD/CD-R) Deck A/B (tape) This button selects deck A or B on a double-cassette tape deck. DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) a DIR B (tape) This button selects the playing direction of deck B. Skip + (MD/CD-R) s Stop f Fast forward (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) w Rewind (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) AV POWER This button turns on the tape deck, MD recorder or CD recorder that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. ■ CD position Select the CD position. Numeric buttons INDEX Pause/Stop function +10 • Press the button once to give a y pause in operation and press once more to stop operation. DISPLAY e Pause YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop DISC SKIP –/+ (for a CD player with CD changer) p Play b Skip – w Search A/B/C/D/E a Skip + s Stop YAMAHA CD player (factory settings): Pause/Stop f Search AV POWER This button turns on the CD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 42 0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 42 1/23/1, 9:28 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ DVD/LD position INTRODUCTION Select the DVD/LD position. Numeric buttons PREPARATION INDEX/Time (DVD) Chapter/Time (LD) +10 DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD) DISPLAY p Play A/B/C/D/E b Skip – (DVD) Skip/Chapter – (LD) w Search e Pause a Skip + (DVD) Skip/Chapter + (LD) s Stop BASIC OPERAIONT f Search AV POWER (DVD) This button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. (LD) This button turns on the LD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. ■ DVD MENU position ADVANCED OPERATION Note • DVD MENU operations cannot be performed for some DVD players. Select the DVD MENU position. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Numeric buttons INDEX +10 DISC SKIP –/+ Return Menu select TITLE Menu up Menu right Menu down MENU APPENDIX Menu left DISPLAY A/B/C/D/E AV POWER This button turns on the DVD player that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for another manufacturer. English • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 43 0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 43 1/23/1, 9:28 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ VCR position ■ CBL/SAT position Select the VCR position. Select the CBL/SAT position. VCR REC Press this button twice to start recording. p Play A/B/C/D/E Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Ch enter/Recall Ch enter _/_ _ _/_ _ CH –/+ DISPLAY CH –/+ e Pause Menu select s Stop w Rewind f Fast forward AV POWER This button turns on a VCR that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for your VCR. Menu left Recall DISPLAY/ Guide (SAT) A/B/C/D/E Menu up Menu right Menu down MENU AV POWER This button turns on a cable TV/satellite tuner that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for your cable TV/satellite tuner. ■ TV position Note • You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for it in the VCR position. Select the TV position. Numeric buttons Ch enter/Recall VCR REC Press this button twice. _/_ _ CH –/+ DISPLAY p VCR play A/B/C/D/E e VCR pause s VCR stop w VCR rewind TV POWER This button turns on a TV that has a remote control with a power button if you have set up the code for your TV. TV VOL +/– TV INPUT f VCR fast forward VCR power TV SLEEP TV MUTE • The dark-shaded buttons do not function even if you have set up the manufacturer code. • Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. In this case, use the original remote control supplied with your component. 44 0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 44 1/23/1, 9:28 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the Manufacturer Code 1 2 3 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit manufacturer code for the component to be used. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash or flashes rapidly several times, repeat step 3 and reenter the code. 3 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 4 Use the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit code for the second (and third) VCR. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. If the indicator does not flash or flashes rapidly several times, repeat step 3 and reenter the code. 5 Press AV POWER (or any other button) to check if you have set up the code correctly. If the VCR cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Set the selector dial to the CBL/SAT or DVD MENU position. APPENDIX • You can set up only one code for one position. • In the DVD/LD and DVD MENU positions: Be sure to set the selector dial to the DVD/LD position before entering the code for the DVD/LD player. You cannot set up the code for a DVD player when the selector dial is set to the DVD MENU position. The code set up in the DVD/LD position is also simultaneously set up in the DVD MENU position. • If your component does not respond to any of the codes listed for the manufacturer, use the original remote control supplied with your component. Turn on the VCR to be used. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes 1 2 ADVANCED OPERATION Press AV POWER (or any other button) to check if you have set up the code correctly. If your component cannot be controlled with the remote control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Note • In order to set a second (and third) VCR in the DVD MENU position, it is necessary to first set up the code for an LD player in the DVD/LD position. BASIC OPERAIONT 5 Set the selector dial to the desired position for the component (TAPE/MD, CD, DVD/LD, etc.). PREPARATION 4 Turn on your component to be used. You can control a second (and third) VCR in the CBL/ SAT and DVD MENU positions if a cable TV/satellite tuner or DVD player is not being used. INTRODUCTION You can set up the code for the manufacturer of your component in each position of the selector dial. ■ To use a second (and third) VCR English 45 0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 45 1/23/1, 9:28 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Returning to the Factory Setting ■ To return to the factory-set codes in all positions 1 2 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. ■ To return to the factory-set codes in each position 1 Set the selector dial to the position for the component to be returned to the factory setting. 2 Press j / i at the same time for about 4 seconds. The indicator flashes twice. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. Enter the code number “9990”. Make sure that the indicator flashes twice. The following codes are factory set. Selector dial position TV CBL/SAT VCR DVD/LD CD TAPE/MD Component TV Satellite tuner VCR DVD player CD player MD recorder Code 0101 0006 0002 0008 (YAMAHA DVD player) 0005 (YAMAHA CD player) 0024 (YAMAHA MD recorder) Set component We recommend that you write all the code numbers you have set on the table above. 46 0108AX620(GB)_40-46_EN 46 1/23/1, 9:28 AM Set code ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM Note • Regardless of the program name and characteristics listed in the table below, select the sound field program that sounds best to you. Hi-Fi DSP Programs No. Program (group) Sub-program Features CONCERT HALL — A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. 5CH STEREO Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. Note • Reverberations (sound effects) for realizing the sound field and unprocessed stereo from the left and right main speakers is output. The sound is not output from the center speaker. (The sound is output when one of these programs is selected while playing a source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. If 5CH STEREO is selected, the sound is output from all speakers regardless of the input source.) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CINEMA DSP Programs ■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 4 to 6 No. Program (group) Sub-program GAME Features This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 5 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE — This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. 47 47 1/23/1, 9:28 AM English ENTERTAINMENT APPENDIX 4 0109AX620(GB)_47-49_EN ADVANCED OPERATION DISCO BASIC OPERATION 1 PREPARATION ■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 4 INTRODUCTION A digital sound field processor (DSP) based on the latest YAMAHA technology is built into this unit. It is possible to play back various sound fields for the source you are listening to. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ For movie programs: Nos. 7 to 9 No. 7 Program (group) Sub-program MOVIE SPECTACLE 70 mm THEATER 1 SPECTACLE SCI-FI 8 Input source Features Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). DGTL SPECTACLE Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SPECTACLE DTS 70 mm SCI-FI Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL SCI-FI Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS SCI-FI DTS MOVIE ADVENTURE 70 mm THEATER 2 ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. DTS ADVENTURE DTS GENERAL 9 q/DTS NORMAL SURROUND ENHANCED 70 mm GENERAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL GENERAL Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS GENERAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ NORMAL Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ NORMAL Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL DTS PRO LOGIC/ ENHANCED Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ ENHANCED Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED DTS This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, the digital sound field processor is not turned on. This program ideally simulates the multisurround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. Notes • The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “NORMAL” of the q/DTS SURROUND program. • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker. • The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 4 (GAME) and 5 to 8. 48 0109AX620(GB)_47-49_EN 48 1/23/1, 9:28 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ■ MOVIE THEATER 1 and 2 The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70 mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. INTRODUCTION Most commercially available movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. When the input source is analog, PCM or encoded with Dolby Digital in 2-channel These programs express an immense sound field and a Presence DSP large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound sound field from the main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater. 70 mm SPECTACLE 70 mm SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE Surround DSP 70 mm GENERAL sound field PREPARATION The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When the input source is encoded with Dolby Digital (5.1-channel) or DTS (Tri-Field CINEMA DSP) These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby DigitalPresence DSP or DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the sound field clear separation of all channels. DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI Left surround DSP Right surround DSP DGTL ADVENTURE sound field sound field DTS ADVENTURE DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. APPENDIX English 49 0109AX620(GB)_47-49_EN 49 1/23/1, 9:28 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What is a sound field? What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. Sound Field Program Parameters DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. See “Sound Field Parameter Descriptions”. 50 0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 50 1/23/1, 9:28 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Changing Parameter Settings 3 1 A/B/C/D/E 2 4 5 Press u/d to select the parameter. 5 Press j / i to change the parameter value. y 6 A/B/C/D/E or 2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust. Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and hold j or i until the value temporarily stops at the factory-set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor. Program No. Program name (group) P07 MOVIE THEATER 1 Cursor P. P. S. S. 70mm Spectacle INIT. DLY • • 13ms ROOM SIZE • • 1.0 DELAY • • • • • 23ms ROOM SIZE • • 1.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press u/d. • You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “10 MEMORY GUARD” to OFF. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. BASIC OPERATION Set the selector dial to the DSP/TUN (or AMP/TUN) position. Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. PREPARATION • When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. 3 1 INTRODUCTION Although it is possible to enjoy playback on your system without changing default setting parameters for the sound field program, it is also possible to enjoy specifically tailor the sound field program to the characteristics of the source and the acoustics of the listening room. 4 APPENDIX Parameters Example of the MOVIE THEATER 1 English 51 0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 51 1/23/1, 9:28 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Sound Field Parameter Descriptions You can adjust the values of certain sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Note • Not all of the following parameters can be found in every program. ■ INIT.DLY (initial delay) (P.INIT.DLY — for the presence sound field) Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the sound source by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. Control range: 1 – 99 msec Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large room, set it to a large value. Sound source First reflection Time Level Level Level Early reflections Time Time INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY Sound source Reflection surface Large value = 99 ms Small value = 1 ms ■ ROOM SIZE (P.ROOM SIZE — for the presence sound field) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. Time Level Level Level Sound source Early reflections Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 52 0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 52 1/23/1, 9:29 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ LIVENESS Function: Sound source INTRODUCTION This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. Control range: 0 – 10 Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The “LIVENESS” parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Level Level Dead Time Time Time Small reflected sound Large reflected sound BASIC OPERATION Sound source Small value = 0 PREPARATION Level Live Large value = 10 ■ S.DELAY (surround delay) Function: ■ S.INIT.DLY (surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. Control range: 1 – 49 msec ADVANCED OPERATION This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound field. Control range: 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 53 0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 53 1/23/1, 9:29 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ S.ROOM SIZE (surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S.LIVENESS (surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control range: 0 – 10 ■ CT.DELAY (center delay) Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 – 50 msec ■ LS.DELAY (left surround delay) Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 – 50 msec ■ RS.DELAY (right surround delay) Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 5 channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 – 50 msec 54 0110AX620(GB)_50-54_EN 54 1/23/1, 9:29 AM APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING ■ General Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page 19 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 20 The BLUE BACK setting under “9 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is input to this unit. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Set BLUE BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD. 37 Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 24 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 24 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 25 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The picture does not appear. The output and input for the video are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of jack (between composites, S-VIDEOs, or components) for both the input and output. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. 19 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. 16, 17 The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 39 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. On-screen display does not appear. No sound and/or no picture. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. 16, 17 16, 17 14, 15 APPENDIX Set the switch fully to the left or right position when the unit is in the standby mode. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. ADVANCED OPERATION 19 BASIC OPERAIONT Firmly connect the power cord. PREPARATION The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. INTRODUCTION Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. 12 – 17 English 55 0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 55 1/23/1, 9:54 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause No sound from the effect speakers. Remedy The sound effect is off. Press EFFECT to turn it on. 29 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 47, 48 25 A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 38 “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 32 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected. Select another DSP program. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. A “humming” sound can be heard. The volume level is low while playing a record. The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 9. Select another DSP program. “1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 34 “1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 34 56 38 47, 48 — “1D LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. The output mode for each speaker (main, center or rear) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 32, 33 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 12, 13 The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to the unit through an MC-head amplifier. 56 0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 47, 48 — The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. Refer to page 1/23/1, 9:54 AM 34 12 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page 12 The component connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. The effect and surround sounds cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the effect and surround sounds by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is only connected to the analog input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the digital input jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “10 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 37 Turn on the power to the component. 30 12 – 15 — The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. — There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment, or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. — ADVANCED OPERATION Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. BASIC OPERAIONT The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. PREPARATION This unit does not operate properly. INTRODUCTION The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 57 0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 57 1/23/1, 9:54 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition the unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The component to be controlled has not been selected. Set the selector dial to the appropriate position, corresponding to the component to be controlled. 40 Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause The unit or other component cannot be controlled. — The remote control cannot control system components. The manufacturer code has not been set up properly. Depending on the manufacturer or the model, some components cannot be controlled with this unit’s remote control even though the code has been set up properly. Enter the code again. 45 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. Use the original remote control supplied with your component. — After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. 58 0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 58 1/24/1, 10:55 AM SPECIFICATIONS VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ................................. 90 W 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ................................................ 100 W • Video Signal Type [Europe and U.K. models] ....................................................... PAL [China and General models] ................................................. NTSC • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ohms .................................................. 130 W • Composite Video Signal Level ................................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and General models only] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ................................................... 115 W • Component Video Signal Level Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms PB/CB, PR/CR ....................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms • Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms ................................................... 120/140/175/210 W • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms .............................................. 80 or more GENERAL • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (MM) .................................................................. ±0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO MM (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V, REC OUT) .... 0.02% or less CD, etc. (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 45 W, 8 ohms, Main L/R) ............................................................................... 0.06% or less • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kohms terminated) to Main L/R .................. 60 dB/45 dB • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 5-ch, 10% THD ................................................................... 610 W • AC Outlets (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe, China and General models] ................... 2 (SWITCHED) [U.K. model] ........................................................ 1 (SWITCHED) • Dimension (W x H x D) ................................... 435 x 151 x 390 mm • Weight ................................................................................... 10.5 kg • Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control ....................................................................................... Batteries ................................................................. Quick Reference Card ........................................................................ Connection Guide * Specifications are subject to change without notice. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz BASS EXTENSION ................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz • Power Consumption ............................................................... 260 W Standby Mode [Europe and U.K. models] ........................... 0.9 W ADVANCED OPERATION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted) [Europe and U.K. models] .................................... 81 dB or more [China and General models] ................................. 86 dB or more CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .... 100 dB or more • Power Supply [Europe and U.K. models] ................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz [China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [General model] ......................... AC110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz BASIC OPERAIONT • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB PREPARATION • IEC Output Power [Europe model only] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ohms ................................................ 100 W • S-Video Signal Level Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C .................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION • Phones Output ..................................................... 400 mV/560 ohms • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .............................................................. 150 mV/47 kohms PHONO ............................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT ...................................................... 150 mV/47 kohms APPENDIX • Maximum Input Signal PHONO MM (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ...................... 100 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................... 2.2 V or more • Output Level REC OUT ........................................................ 150 mV/1.2 kohms PRE OUT [Europe and U.K. models only] ......... 2.1 V/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER .................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms English 59 0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 59 1/24/1, 5:40 PM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Surround uses a four analog channel recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: two left and right main channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With three front channels (left, center and right), and two rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five fullrange audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). Using two-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the five full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround ■ CINEMA DSP ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP in a minimum two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a six-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system is practically distortion-free, clear 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, two rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). 60 0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 60 D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 1/23/1, 9:54 AM GLOSSARY ■ I/O assignment (SET MENU) With S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. Although component is normally connected according to jack names shown on the rear panel, this unit includes a function that assigns jacks according to the component being connected. If the component being used differs from the component name shown for this unit’s component video input jacks or digital input/output jacks, it is possible to assign jacks according to the component being connected. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more component. ■ Component video signal PREPARATION With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. INTRODUCTION ■ S VIDEO signal ■ PCM (Linear PCM) BASIC OPERAIONT Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. APPENDIX English 61 0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 61 1/23/1, 9:54 AM INDEX A L Accesories ................................................................................... 3 AC outlets .................................................................................. 19 LFE ...................................................................................... 36, 60 B Manufacturer codes ................................................................ 45, i Memory back-up ........................................................... 32, 38, 51 MEMORY GUARD (SET MENU) ........................................... 37 Muting ....................................................................................... 25 Balance (L/R BALANCE) (SET MENU) ................................. 34 BGV function ............................................................................ 26 C CBL/SAT position ..................................................................... 44 CD position ................................................................................ 42 CINEMA DSP ..................................................................... 47, 60 Component video ...................................................................... 61 Connections Audio components (MD recorder, CD recorder, CD player and turntable) .................................................... 12 External amplifier (Europe and U.K. models only) ........... 18 External decoder ................................................................. 18 Power supply cords ............................................................ 19 Speakers ............................................................................. 16 Video components (DVD player, VCR and TV/digital TV or cable TV/satellite tuner) ......................... 14 D Delay time ................................................................................. 37 DISPLAY SET (SET MENU) BLUE BACK ..................................................................... 37 DIMMER ........................................................................... 37 OSD SHIFT ........................................................................ 37 DOLBY D. SET (SET MENU) D-RANGE .......................................................................... 36 LFE LEVEL ....................................................................... 36 Dolby Digital ............................................................................. 60 Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic) ........................................... 60 DSP program CINEMA DSP program ...................................................... 47 Hi-Fi DSP program ............................................................. 47 DTS ........................................................................................... 60 DTS SET (SET MENU) ............................................................ 36 Dust protection cap .................................................................... 12 DVD/LD position ...................................................................... 43 DVD MENU position ................................................................ 43 E External decoder ........................................................................ 18 F Front panel ................................................................................... 4 Front panel display ...................................................................... 9 H HP TONE CTRL (SET MENU) ................................................ 35 I I/O ASSIGNMENT (SET MENU) ...................................... 35, 61 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch ........................................... 19 INPUT MODE (SET MENU) ................................................... 35 Input modes ............................................................................... 26 M P PCM ........................................................................................... 61 PHONO jack .............................................................................. 12 Playing ....................................................................................... 24 Power supply cords ................................................................... 19 R Rear panel .................................................................................. 10 Recording .................................................................................. 30 Remote control Basic operation ..................................................................... 6 Batteries ................................................................................ 3 Operation range .................................................................... 8 Setup codes ......................................................................... 45 S Sampling frequency ............................................................. 25, 61 Selector dial ........................................................................... 6, 40 SET MENU ............................................................................... 31 SILENT CINEMA ............................................................... 29, 60 Sleep timer ................................................................................. 39 Sound field ................................................................................ 50 SP DELAY TIME (SET MENU) .............................................. 37 Speaker Output balance (test tone) .................................................. 22 Output levels (LEVEL mode) ............................................ 38 Output mode (SET MENU) ............................................... 21 Placement ........................................................................... 11 SPEAKER SET (SET MENU) CENTER SP ....................................................................... 32 LFE/BASS OUT ................................................................ 34 MAIN LEVEL .................................................................... 34 MAIN SP ............................................................................ 33 REAR L/R SP ..................................................................... 33 Stereo reproduction ................................................................... 29 Subwoofer ................................................................................. 17 S VIDEO ................................................................................... 61 T TAPE/MD position .................................................................... 42 Test tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) ............................................... 22 TV position ................................................................................ 44 V VCR position ............................................................................. 44 Video jack .................................................................................. 14 Virtual CINEMA DSP ......................................................... 29, 60 62 0111AX620(GB)_55-62_EN 62 1/24/1, 5:40 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTES DES CODES FABRICANT VERZEICHNIS DER HERSTELLERCODES LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER ELENCO DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES LIJST VAN CODES VAN FABRIKANT CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971 CLATRONIC 1181, 1331 CONCERTO 0791 CONDOR 0761 CONTEC 0151, 1171 CONTINENTAL EDISON 0571, 0651, 0901 CRAIG 1171 CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CROWN 2541 CTC CLATRONIC 0261 CXC 1171 DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511, 2611 DANSAI 0101 DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1691 DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1681 DEGRAAF 0451, 1351 DIXI 0991, 1511 DOMEOS 0101 DORIC 1031 DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611, 1641, 2101 DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621, 2111 DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2121, 2151 DYNATRON 0101 ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031 ELECTRO TECH 1511 ELEKTRONSKA 0771 ELMAN 0261, 1621 ELTA 1511 EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081, 1121, 1171, 1261, 1301 ERRES 0101 ETRON 1981 EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601, 0771, 1091, 1621, 2001 FENNER 0101, 1511 FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281, 2311, 2341 FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281 FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931, 2281 FILMNET 1141 FINLANDIA 0451, 2321 FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491, 0521, 0781, 0811, 0871, 1081, 1411, 1421, 1981, 2051, 2091, 2121, 2151, 2551 TV ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911, 1021, 1081 AIKO 0891 AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231, 1191, 1351, 1591, 1641, 1791, 1891, 1981 AKURA 1331 ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361 ALBIRAL 1971 AMSTRAD 1301, 1511 ANAM 1171 ARC EN CIEL 0571 ARCAM 0571, 0761 ARISTONA 0751 ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641 ASA 0411, 0451, 0521, 0781, 0871, 1021, 1081, 1421, 2051, 2091, 2151, 2551 ASTRA 1511 ATANTIC 0761 ATLANTIC 0761 ATORI 1511 AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511 AUSIND 0491, 1411 AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481, 0491, 0601, 0781, 0951, 1051, 1081, 1391, 1421 BAIRD 1101, 1351 BANG & OLUFSEN 1081 BASIC LINE 1321, 1331 BAUER 1451 BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121, 0131, 0221, 1561 BEKO 2491, 2501 BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241, 0251, 0471, 0741, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1821 BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081 BRITANNIA 0761 BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021, 1081 BSR 0391, 0691, 1621, 1901, 1981 BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331, 1641, 1741, 2131, 2151 BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611 CANDLE 0791 CENTURY 1021, 1081 CGE 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1531, 1611, 1621, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CITIZEN 0791 FIRST LINE FISHER 1981 0021, 0091, 0141, 0511, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2091 FORGESTONE 2281 FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761, 1081, 1451, 1541, 1981 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0021, 0431, 0451, 0591, 1411 FORTRESS 1081 FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981 FUJITSU 1261 FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171, 1181, 1261 FUTURETECH 1171 GBC 0021, 0141, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GEC 0451, 1101, 1281, 2321 GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1281, 1561 GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GENERAL TECHNIC 2681 GENEXXA 0451, 1331 GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761, 0791, 1371, 1491, 1511, 1561, 1621, 1641 GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371, 1641, 2301 GORENJE 0981, 1061 GRAETZ 0451 GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1111, 1351, 1981, 2321 GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1031, 1311, 1521, 1561, 1641 GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471, 0491, 0711, 0741, 1381, 2021, 2041, 2141, 2151 HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141, 0431, 0591, 1561 HANTAREX 0581 HEMMERMANN 0061 HIFIVOX 0331, 0571 HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451, 1261, 1351, 1511, 1641, 1981, 2011 i 08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 2 1/23/1, 10:01 AM HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031, 0081, 0141, 0291, 0331, 0341, 0451, 0601, 0631, 0701, 1281, 1561, 1601, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1861, 1871, 1881, 1891, 1941, 1981, 2051, 2321, 2341 HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511, 1621 IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1611, 1621, 2201, 2251, 2271 INGERSOL 1511 INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841, 1101, 1331, 1371, 1511, 2011 INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061, 0121, 0181, 0451, 0491, 1081, 1641, 1791, 1821, 1981, 2231 IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331, 1371, 1411, 1511, 2011 ISUKAI 1331 ITT 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 JVC (VICTOR) 0071, 0721, 1441, 1581, 1591, 1741, 1791 KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331 KAMOSONIC 0601 KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841, 1091, 1321, 1511, 1561, 2051 KAWASHO 0761 KENDO 0261 KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951, 1981 KONKA 2701 KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021, 1081, 1541 NECKERMANN KTV LENOIR LEYEO LIFETEC 0601, 1171 0601, 1511 1181 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581, 0611, 1081 LOGIC 1691, 2281 LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281 LOWEWE 0831 LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901 LUXMAN 0791 LUXMAN STEREO TUNER 0791 LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181, 0341, 0421, 0451, 0461, 0491, 0601, 0671, 1351, 1371, 1561, 1601, 1911, 1921, 1981 LYCO 1181 MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261, 0581, 0641, 0771, 1021, 1081, 1621, 1981 MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 2001 MANESTH 0101 MARANTZ 0101 MARELLI 1081 MARK 0101 MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601, 0691, 1101, 1151, 1241, 1271, 1301, 1511, 1561, 1681, 1691 MAXIMAL 0071, 1981 MCMICHAEL 1281 MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 MEMOREX 1511 METZ 0231, 0741, 1001, 1041, 1081, 1481, 2071, 2081 MGA 1231 MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491, 1381, 2141, 2151 MISTRAL 2281 MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231, 0661, 1191, 1201, 1231, 1671, 1691, 1741 MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581, 0591, 0761, 0771, 1371, 1431, 2031 MTC 0791 MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601, 0641, 0981, 1321, 1511 MURPHY 0451, 2091 MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031 N.E.I. 0101, 0961 NAD 1341 NEC 0141, 1711, 1721, 1731 NEDIATOR NICAMAGIC NIKKAI 0451, 0601, 0981, 1081, 1561, 1931, 1981, 2211, 2231, 2241 0101 0761 1101, 1331, 1641, 1701, 2011 NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591, 0641, 1381, 1411 NOGAMATIC 0571 NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431, 2461, 2791 NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 1051, 1131, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981 OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321, 0441, 1661 ONCEAS 0601 ONWA 1171 ORION 0061, 0391, 0691, 0851, 1211, 1241, 1251, 1301, 1481, 1511, 1681, 1691, 1981, 2371, 2421 OSAKA 2011 OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011 OSUME 0151 OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121, 0141, 0221, 0601, 1561, 1741, 1981 PAEL 0591, 1411 PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211, 0451, 0701, 1311, 1751, 1961, 2561, 2741 PANORAMIC 2351 PATHE MARCONI 0571 PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591, 1621, 1661, 1971 PAUSA 1511 PAUZA 1511 PERDIO 0891, 1101 PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1611, 1621, 1751, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2451, 2471 PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591, 0621, 0681, 0751, 0761, 1021, 1081, 1281, 2031, 2281, 2291, 2431, 2441, 2511, 2731 PHOENIX 1081 PHONOLA 0751, 1081 PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341, 1821 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0411, 0451, 0491, 0581, 1411 PRANDONI-PROMCE 0451, 0491, 0581 PRIMA PROFEX PROTECH QUELLE 0451 1981 0641, 1181, 1981 0041, 0061, 0121, 0221, 0231, 0391, 0491, 0521, 0601, 0781, 1371, 1381, 1411, 1421, 1641, 1681, 2051, 2091, 2141, 2151, 2201, 2211, 2231, 2241, 2251, 2271, 2551, 2571, 2581 REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451, 0661, 0771, 1081 RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091 RADIOLA 2291 RANK 0481, 2151 RBM 2131, 2151 RBM (UK) 0481 REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641, 1981, 2331 REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081, 1031 REX 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 RFT 0991, 2511 ROADSTAR 1321, 1511 ROTEL 0151 SABA 0291, 0331, 0421, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 0581, 0651, 0731, 0931, 1021, 1071, 1081, 1131, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 SACCS 1971 SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161, 1241, 1301, 1511, 1671, 1681, 1691 SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061, 0071, 0341, 0451, 0671, 1291, 1351, 1521, 1561, 1601, 1641, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1981, 2321 SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581, 0641, 1091, 1371, 1411, 2001 SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841, 0981, 1101, 1181, 1371, 1511, 2011 SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1101, 1111, 1291, 1351, 1691, 1741, 2051, 2091, 2551 SBR 0681, 0751, 1281, 2281 SCHAUB LORENZ 0451 SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091, 0451, 0511, 0591, 0601, 0751, 1321, 1361, 1621, 1641, 2101, 2111, 2291 SCOTT 1171, 1261 SEG 0261, 0601, 0821, 0991 SEI 0641, 0691, 1081, 1301, 1481, 1981 SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SENTRA 1601 SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191, 1761, 1781 SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581, 0641, 1021, 1081, 1981 SICATEL 1971 SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231, 0451, 0741, 2011, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 SILVER 1181 SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021, 1081 SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101, 0261, 0391, 0641, 0691, 0851, 0941, 1021, 1081, 1241, 1301, 1321, 1481, 1631, 1981 SKANTIC 0451 SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011 SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511 SONY 0141, 0171, 1121, 1681, 1691, 2751 SOUNDESIGN 1171 SSS 1171 STERN 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SUNKAI 0691 SUPRA 0791 TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611, 1021, 1421, 1771, 1791, 2081 TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331, 1531 TASHIKO 0141 TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1681, 1691 TCM 2621, 2641, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 TECHNICS 1311 TECHWOOD 0791 TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261 TELE 1141 TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731, 1821 TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311, 0551, 0731, 1131, 1471, 1591, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1991, 2161, 2171, 2181, 2191, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2521, 2631 TELETECH 1511 TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401, 2411 TENSAI 1331, 2091 TEXET 0601 THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531, 0571, 0631, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1241, 1571, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2531 THORN 0741, 0861, 2091, 2251, 2271, 2281 ii 08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 3 1/23/1, 10:01 AM THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281 TMK 0141, 0791, 1471 TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481, 1221, 1271, 1701, 1741, 1851, 2151, 2801, 2811 TRANS CONTINENS 0451 TRISTAR 2281 TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121 UHER 0431, 0451, 0481, 0491, 0511, 1311, 1541 ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591, 1021, 1081, 1981 UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051 UNIVOX 1971 VEGAVOX 0811 VEXA 0101, 1511 VIDEOTON 2481 VORTEC 0101, 0651 VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491, 1021, 1081 WALTHAM 0451 WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241 WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 1971, 1981, 2001 WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981 WEGA COLOR 1021 WELTBLICK 0101 WESTON 1621 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0101, 0261, 0431, 0591, 0761, 1401, 1541 YOKO 0601, 1511 ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 ZOPPAS 0451 SATELLITE TUNER AKAI ALBA AMSTRAD 1276 0826, 1276 0166, 0796, 1016, 1026, 1296 ANKARO 0476 AST 0406 ASTRA 0126 BARCOM 0476 BLAUPUNKT 0966 BMC SATELLITE 0106 BRITISH TELECOM 1276 BUSH 0826 BUSH (UK) 0956 CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276 CANAL PLUS (FRANCE) 1536 CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006 COLUMBUS 0616 CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426 DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866 DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476 DRAKE 1516 ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606, 0626, 0666, 0926, 0996, 1046, 1056, 1066, 1106 ELTA 1286 ELTA SAT 0146 EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246 FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186, 0296, 0846, 0956, 1306 FINLUX 0976 FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776 FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636, 1056 GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336 GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956, 0966 HIGH PERFORMANCE 0916 HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966 HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706, 0946 ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886 ITT 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 JEEMON 0146 JERROLD 0846, 0986 JOHANSSON 0246 JVC 1276 KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276, 0366 KOSMOS 0266 KYOSTAR 1036, 1086 LENG 0246 LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356 LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446, 0466, 0506, 1156 MACAB 0356 MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256, 0956 MEDION 1326, 1346 METZ 0966 MICROMAXX 1326, 1346 MITSUBISHI 0966 MORGANS 0596 MURATTO 0406 NEC 0286, 0316, 0766, 0786, 0836 NETWORK 0046 NIKKO 1136, 1146 CABLE TV CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476 CLYDE CABLEVISION 1426 FILMNET 1396, 1436 FRANCE TELECOM 1386 GEC 1426 JERROLD 1416 MOVIE TIME 1466 NSC 1466 PHILIPS 1386 PIONEER 0006 SAMSUNG 1496 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 1486, 1506 STARCOM 1416 STS 1466 TANDBERG 1366 TELE 1436 TELE +1 1436 TELESERVICE 1406, 1476 TUDI 1376 UNITED CABLE 1416 ZENITH 1406 NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156, 1166, 1336 NORSAT 0786 OTTO VERSAND 0966 PACE 0046, 0176, 0296, 0936, 0956, 1306, 1566, 1576 PACE MSS 0946 PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK) 1526 PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706 PALSAT 0396 PALTEC 0706 PANASONIC 0806, 1306 PANSAT 1076 PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476, 0956, 1126, 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216, 1306, 1316 PROSAT 1176 PTT TELECOM 0306, 0896 QUELLE 0966 RADIX 1056 REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786 RFT 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216 SAGEM 1256, 1546 SAKURA 0566, 0816 SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136, 0446, 0456, 0486, 0496, 0576 SAMSUNG 0746, 0756 SAT 0406 SATCOM 0896 SATECO 0646 SECTOR 1266 SEDEA 1096 SENTRA 0416 SIEMENS 0896, 0966 SINTRACK 0906 SKYLAB 0476 SKYSCAN 0876 SONY 0736, 0946 STELLA 0306 STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036, 1086 STV 0636 TANDBERG 1116 TANDY 0916 TANTEC 0616 TATUNG 0516, 0546 TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526, 0556, 1056 TELECOM 0306 TELEMAX 0586 THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076, 0176, 0186, 0956 TOSHIBA 0946 TPS (FRANCE) 1546 TRIAD 0406 UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676, 0716, 0726 US ELECTRONICS 0886 VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076 VTECH 0436 WINERSAT 0246 WISI 0056, 0356, 0376, 0386, 0406, 0656, 1056, 1156 WOLSEY 0916 XCOM MULTIMEDIA 1556 XSAT (FRANCE) 1556 ZEHNDER 0266, 0406 ZENDER 0406 iii 08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 4 1/23/1, 10:01 AM VCR AIWA AKAI 0042, 0352, 0432 0042, 0422, 0492, 0582, 0612, 0642, 0652, 0762, 0912 ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0972 AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452 ANITECH 0002 ANITSCH 1002 ASA 0012, 0052 AUDIOSONIC 0002 BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492 BANG & OLUFSEN 0042 BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812 BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252, 0462, 0672, 0992 BRIONVEGA 0032 BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0512, 0972 BUSH (UK) 0812 CAPEHART 0112 CGE 0042, 0432, 0762 CRAIG 0072, 0482 CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622 DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622 DANSAI 0012 DAYTRON 0112 DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432, 0942 DECCA (UK) 0052 DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432, 0532, 0602 DIXI 0442 DUAL 0042, 0632 DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532 DYNATECH 0432 DYNATRON 0012 ELBE 0122 ELIN 0072 EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202, 0432, 0512, 0522 ERRES 0012 FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722, 0852, 0902, 1012, 1022, 1082 FIDELITY 0432 FINLANDIA 0052, 0532 FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052, 0082, 0262, 0382, 0432, 0462, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0602, 0912 FIRST LINE 0002, 0912 FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532, 0542, 0572, 0592 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0012, 0052 FRONTECH 0112 FUNAI 0432 GBC 0002 GEC (UK) 0022, 0052 GELOSO 0002 GENERAL TECHNIC 1172 GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812, 0952 GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282, 0432, 0502 GOODMANS (UK) 0002 GRAETZ 0022, 0042 GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532, 0572 NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762, 1152 NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0402, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0792, 0832, 0842, 0872 OLYMPUS 0462 OPTONICA 0132, 0502 ORION 0162, 0202, 0312, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0982 OSAKA 0432 OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432 OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062, 0812 PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462, 0672, 0992, 1092, 1102, 1182 PENTAX 0172, 0602 PERDIO 0432 PHILCO 1062 PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092, 0152, 0182, 0362, 0372, 0382, 0472, 0502, 1072 PHONOLA 0052, 0152 PILOT 0012 PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372, 0472 PORTLAND 0112 PROLINE 0432 PYE 0052, 0152 QUARTZ 0572 QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042, 0052, 0062, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0462, 0522, 0942 RADIONETTE 0022 REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0502, 0532, 0572 RET 1072 REX 0042, 0742, 0782 RICOH 0952 SABA 0042, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0792, 0872 SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0972 SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812, 0822, 0912 SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622, 0652, 1192 SANSUI 0042, 0142 SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562, 0572 SBR 0052, 0152, 0182 SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042 SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052, 0072, 0432 SEG 0002, 0072 SEI-SINUDYNE 0442 SELECO 0042 SENTRA 0112 SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702 SHINTOM 0002 SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252, 0572 GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462, 0602, 0812, 0822 GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092, 0232, 0252, 0262, 0752, 0802 HANSEATIC 0052, 0812 HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922 HCM 0002 HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412, 0442, 0522 HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292, 0432, 0602, 0662, 0812, 1022 IMPERIAL 0072, 0432 INGERSOL 0442 INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072 INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172 INTERFUNK 0022, 0052 IRRADIO 0002, 0012 ITT 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 JENSEN 0042 JVC (VICTOR) 0042, 0102, 0142, 0272, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0902 KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812 KENDO 0492 KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572 LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172 LLOYD 0432 LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152 LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442 LUMA 0162 LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812 M ELECTRONIC 0432 MAGNADYNE 0052 MAGNASONIC 0572 MANESTH 0012 MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092, 0122, 0502 MARK 0012 MARTA 0012 MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0812, 0972 MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172 MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0532, 0572 METZ 0062, 0092, 0932 MGA 0912 MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172 MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252 MINOLTA 0172, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142, 0912, 0922 MTC 0072, 0432 MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062, 0282, 0432 MURPHY 0432 N.E.I. 0012, 0052 NATIONAL 0462 NEC 0042, 0122, 0142 NECKERMANN 0032, 0042, 0052, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0522, 0572, 0762, 0812 NIKKAI 0112 NOBLIKO 0092 SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442, 0932 SONOKO 0282 SONY 0432, 0552, 0682, 0692, 0942, 0952, 0962, 1122, 1132 STS 0602 SUNKAI 0512 SUNSTAR 0432 SYLVANIA 0432, 0912 SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912 TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522, 0932 TASHIKO 0132, 0432 TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432, 0922 TCM 1142, 1162, 1172 TEAC 0042, 0432 TECHNICS 0462 TEKNIKA 0012, 0432 TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0882, 0892 TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052 TENOSAL 0002 THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0402, 0632, 0762 THORN 0042, 0902 THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222, 0302, 0712, 0722, 0742, 0762, 0852, 0862, 0872, 0902 TMK 0522 TONSAI 0002 TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912 TOTEVISION 0012, 0072 TRIUMPH 0922 UHER 0042, 0072 ULTRAVOX 0032 UNITECH 0072 VECTOR RESEARCH 0122 VIDEON 1162, 1172 WELTBLICK 0012 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0032 XENON 0162 YAMAHA 0042, 1202 YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072 DVD PLAYER AKAI DENON HITACHI JVC KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MITSUBISHI ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER PROSCAN RCA SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TECHNICS THOMSON TOSHIBA YAMAHA ZENITH 0108\ 0368 0388 0168, 0348 0288 0248 0268 0128, 0248 0048 0188, 0248 0208, 0228 0308 0308 0148 0068 0028 0048 0328 0088, 0248 0008, 0048, 0188, 0248 0248 LD PLAYER AIWA FUNAI HITACHI MAGNAVOX PANASONIC PIONEER RCA REALISTIC SAMSUNG SONY VICTOR YAMAHA 0137 0137 0047 0077 0027 0037 0067 0137 0017, 0087 0057, 0097, 0107, 0117 0127 0007 CD PLAYER ACCUPHASE ADC ADCOM AKAI 0315 0865 0785, 1015 0115, 0125, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0935, 1155 ARCAM 1875 ARCAM-ROTEL 0165 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835 AUDIOSONIC 0155 AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245, 1765, 1915, 1935 BSR 0875 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 1075 CARRERA 0555, 0875 CARVER 0825, 1415 CYRUS-ROTEL 0205 DENON 0045, 0955, 1045, 1595, 1795, 1805 DUAL 1005 ELIN 0185 EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675 FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605, 0825, 1165, 1175 GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855, 0875, 0995, 1265, 1285, 1345, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195, 1585 GRUNDIG 0175 HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495, 0565, 1135, 1145, 1155 HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685, 0945, 1005, 1015, 1225, 1545 INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015 ITT-NOKIA 0185 JVC (VICTOR) 0385, 0395, 0455, 0575, 0585 KARCHER 0485 KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145, 0215, 0595, 0675, 0695, 0705, 0715, 0925, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 KORTING 0175 LIFETEC 2015 LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645, 1655, 1665 LINN 0165, 1875 LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795, 0805, 1295, 1305, 1555, 1925 iv 08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 5 4/17/1, 2:12 PM THOMSON 1005 TOSHIBA 0755, 0765 VECTOR RESEARCH 0555, 0865 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085, 0345, 0615, 0655, 0815, 0835, 0895, 1815 LUXOR MAGNAVOX MARANTZ 0185, 1895, 1905 1865, 1875 0165, 0175, 0545, 0665, 1275, 1335, 1405, 1505, 1875, 1955 MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605 MCS 0535 MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005, 2015 MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1675 MGA 1125 MICROMAXX 2015 MISSION 0165, 1875 MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205 NAD 0135, 0255, 0285, 0295, 0305, 0345, 0755, 0765, 1315, 1325 NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565 NEC 0405, 0535, 0775, 0785 NECKERMAN 0155, 0225 NIKKO 0835, 1165 OCEANIC 0185 OKANO 0155, 0225 ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425, 1455, 1515 PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615, 1625 PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195, 1865, 1875 PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425, 0435, 0445, 0525, 0855, 1035, 1945 PROTON 0905, 1875 QUASAR 1075 RADIOLA 1845, 1855 RADIOTONE 0485 REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1575 ROTEL 1875 SABA 1005 SAE 1875 SALORA 0185 SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975, 0985, 1255, 1675, 1875 SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845, 0915 SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855 SCOTT 1285, 1675 SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025, 1115, 1275, 1635, 1785, 1815, 1825, 1835 SHERWOOD 1275, 1445 SIEMENS 1085 SIGNATURE 1155 SONY 0345, 0355, 0365, 0375, 0865, 1685, 1695, 1705, 1715, 1725, 1735, 1745 SYLVANIA 1875 TANDBERG 1885 TASHIKO 1525 TCM 1985, 2015 TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275, 1365, 1375, 1395, 1435, 1465, 1475 TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065, 1075, 1625 TELEFUNKEN 1005 THETA DIGITAL 1865 CD RECORDER/CD-RW HITACHI JVC MARANTZ PHILIPS PIONEER YAMAHA 0304 0334 0314, 0324 0274 0284, 0294 0244 MD RECORDER KENWOOD SHARP PIONEER SONY YAMAHA 0214 0264 0254 0224 0024, 0224, 0234 TAPE DECK AKAI DENON GRUNDIG HARMAN JVC KENWOOD KORTING LUXMAN MARANTZ NAD ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER SONY YAMAHA 0124 0204 0134 0044 0194 0164 0134 0054, 0064, 0074, 0084 0134, 0144 0174 0184 0134, 0144, 0154 0034, 0114 0094, 0104 0004, 0014 v 08AX620(GB)_code(GB) 6 1/23/1, 10:01 AM GB DSP-AX620 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100AX620(GB)-cv1/4 1 DSP-AX620 Natural Sound AV Amplifier Amplificateur audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia ID V722690-1 1/24/1, 11:01 AM Connection Guide (when listening to a digital 5.1-channel source) Main speakers A DVD player AUDIO OUT OPTICAL L S VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT Main speakers B COMPONENT VIDEO OUT R R OPTICAL OUT S VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L O R VIDEO OUT L R L COMPONENT VIDEO OUT V S DIGITAL INPUT CD SIGNAL GND DVD R TUNER L D-TV/CBL R MONITOR OUT + SPEAKERS — + — L A COAXIAL MAIN OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 6CH INPUT MAIN DVD L SURROUND L DVD CENTER D-TV/CBL Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT IN VCR 1 OUT IN VCR 2 OUT /DVR B OUTPUT R L R REAR (SURROUND) L VIDEO CENTER MAIN + — MD/CD-R S VIDEO R R SUB WOOFER VIDEO SIGNAL OPTICAL MD/CD-R R + — + — CENTER L L REAR (SURROUND) R DIGITAL OUTPUT PHONO CD IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) MD/CD-R IN D-TV/CBL DVD AUDIO SIGNAL OUT VCR 1 IN OUT VCR 2/DVR SUB WOOFER OUTPUT S * (Europe model) Europe and U.K. models only * V COMPONENT VIDEO IN L S VIDEO IN Analog signal S Video signal S VIDEO IN R V O Video signal Optical signal Signal flow Video Monitor Subwoofer system Center speaker R L Rear speakers V728170 DSP-AX620 Quick Reference Card AMP/TUN DSP DSP/TUN INPUT DSP INPUT Input selector buttons DSP program group buttons 6CH INPUT EFFECT PRESET –/+ A/B/C/D/E TEST j/i A/B/C/D/E u/d SET MENU ON SCREEN LEVEL STANDBY TV POWER POWER VOLUME +/– TV VOLUME DSP program TV INPUT group buttons Input selector buttons SLEEP MUTE 6CH INPUT EFFECT TAPE/MD (CD-R) CD INPUT DSP A/B/C/D/E p Play DIR A (tape) b Skip – (MD/CD-R) w Rewind (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) INPUT Numeric buttons (MD/CD-R) INDEX (CD-R) +10 (MD/CD-R) Numeric buttons Deck A/B (tape) DISPLAY (MD/CD-R) INDEX +10 e Pause (MD/CD-R) r Rec/Pause (tape/MD) DSP a DIR B (tape) Skip + (MD/CD-R) s Stop f Fast forward (tape) Search (MD/CD-R) AV POWER DISC SKIP –/+ p Play b Skip – DISPLAY e Pause a Skip + w Search s Stop f Search A/B/C/D/E AV POWER V728090 V620(Q)_Quick 1 1/16/1, 11:25 AM Quick Reference Card DVD/LD DVD MENU INPUT DSP INPUT DSP Numeric buttons Numeric buttons INDEX/Time (DVD) Chapter/Time (LD) +10 INDEX +10 DISC SKIP –/+ DISC SKIP –/+ (DVD) p Play A/B/C/D/E b Skip – (DVD) Skip/Chapter – (LD) w Search DISPLAY e Pause a Skip + (DVD) Skip/Chapter + (LD) s Stop f Search Return A/B/C/D/E Menu select Menu right Menu left Menu down MENU TITLE AV POWER AV POWER TV VCR INPUT DSP CBL/SAT INPUT DSP Numeric buttons Ch enter/ Recall CH –/+ w Rewind A/B/C/D/E DISPLAY e Pause DSP INPUT Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Ch enter/ Recall CH –/+ CH –/+ _/_ _ _/_ _ *1 VCR REC p Play DISPLAY Menu up *1 VCR REC A/B/C/D/E VCR play DISPLAY VCR pause VCR stop VCR fast forward s Stop VCR rewind f Fast forward AV POWER TV POWER TV INPUT TV VOL +/– TV SLEEP Menu select Menu left A/B/C/D/E Recall VCR power Ch enter _/_ _ DISPLAY/ Guide (SAT) Menu up Menu right Menu down MENU AV POWER TV MUTE *1 Press this button twice to start recording. Appuyer deux fois sur cette touche pour commencer l’enregistrement. Drücken Sie diese Taste zweimal, um die Aufnahme zu starten. Tryck två gånger på den här knappen för att börja spela in. Premere due volte questo tasto per iniziare la registrazione. Presione dos veces este botón para empezar a grabar. Druk tweemaal op deze toets om met opnemen te beginnen. V728090 V620(Q)_Quick 2 1/16/1, 11:25 AM
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73

Yamaha DSP-AX620 Handleiding

Categorie
Audio versterkers
Type
Handleiding